JP4689519B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by, for example, a pachinko gaming machine or a coin gaming machine. Specifically, a game is performed by driving a game ball into the game area, and a variable display device that displays a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified and displays a display result, and the game ball wins a prize. A variable winning ball apparatus that changes between a first state advantageous to an easy player and a second state unfavorable to a player that makes it difficult for a player to win a game ball compared to the first state, and an effect of performing a predetermined effect And the variable winning ball apparatus is intermittently moved from the second state to the first state when the display result of the variable information identification display on the variable display device is a predetermined specific display result. When the number of game balls awarded to the variable winning ball device in the round reaches a prescribed winning number, the variable winning ball device is operated to the second state. The Exit und, relates to a gaming machine to control the specific game state to be repeated the number of times determined in advance the rounds.

  As a game machine generally known from the past, for example, a game is performed by placing a game ball into a game area, and a variable display of a plurality of types of identification information such as symbols that can be individually identified is performed. Disadvantageous for a variable display device for deriving and displaying a display result, a first state (for example, an open state) that is advantageous for a player who easily wins a game ball, and a player who is less likely to win a game ball than the first state In some cases, there is provided a variable winning ball apparatus that changes into a second state (for example, a closed state) and an effect means for performing a predetermined effect. In such a gaming machine, when the display result of the variation display of the identification information on the variation display device becomes a predetermined specific display result (a jackpot display result), the variable winning ball apparatus is moved from the second state to the first. A round that is operated by intermittently switching to a state is executed, and when the number of winning game balls to the variable winning ball device in the round reaches a prescribed winning number, the variable winning ball device is operated to the second state. In some cases, the game is controlled to a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) in which the round is ended and the round is repeated a predetermined number of times.

  For such a gaming machine, the number of continuation rounds as the number of rounds in which the big hit gaming state continues is determined by internal lottery, and in the big hit gaming state, the number of pseudo continuation rounds different from the determined true continuous round number is recognized. After displaying the number of rounds by displaying an image of a possible mode, the number of rounds is notified by displaying an image of a mode capable of recognizing the true number of continuous rounds determined by the internal lottery at a predetermined timing. There is a thing (patent document 1). In such a gaming machine, notification of the number of rounds is performed at intervals between rounds.

In addition, as a gaming machine that intermittently opens and closes the variable winning ball device when a specific big hit game state is reached, there is an effect that makes the big hit game state appear as follows. Specifically, the total number of rounds in which the jackpot gaming state continues is determined by internal lottery, and the number of specified winnings corresponding to the number of rounds less than the determined total number of rounds is the number that can be expected to win (hereinafter, winning expectation) Number). When there is a winning of the expected number of winnings, based on the number of remaining rounds of the total number of rounds, it is notified whether or not the big hit gaming state will continue, and when it continues, the remaining rounds of the total number of rounds Based on this, the expected number of winnings in the continuous jackpot gaming state is notified. In addition, the display for specifying the actual number of winnings for the notified prescribed winnings is performed in a manner that is visible to the player. By performing such notification, control is performed so that the big hit gaming state continues.
JP 2004-57311 A (FIG. 10, paragraph number 0070)

  However, in the gaming machine as described above, since the notification that the big hit gaming state will continue is performed between rounds, if there are more wins than the prescribed number of wins in one round, In spite of the fact that the number of winnings has reached the expected number of winnings, notification that the big hit gaming state will not continue is not performed. As a result, in the conventional gaming machine, there is a risk of distrust to the player regarding the effect related to the big hit gaming state.

  The present invention has been conceived in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent a player from feeling distrust in the performance in a specific gaming state.

Specific examples of means for solving the problems and their effects

(1) A variation in which a game is played by placing a game ball into the game area (game area 41), and a plurality of types of identification information (special symbols) each identifiable can be displayed in a variable manner to display and display a display result. The display device (the special symbol display device 44a, the effect display device 44b) and the first state (open state) advantageous for the player who is easy to win the game ball and the game ball is less likely to win the game than the first state. A variable winning ball apparatus (first special variable winning ball apparatus 66) that changes to a second state (closed state) that is disadvantageous to the player, and an effecting means (effect control microcomputer 900) that performs a predetermined effect. And the variable winning ball apparatus is changed from the second state to the first state when the display result of the variable display of the identification information in the variable display device becomes a predetermined specific display result (big hit display result). Are intermittently operated (the opening / closing piece 81 is opened and closed 18 times), and the number of game balls to be awarded to the variable winning ball device in the round is a predetermined prize. When the number reaches 10 (for example, 10), the variable winning ball apparatus is operated to the second state to end the round, and the round is determined a predetermined number of times (for example, 2, 8, 10, 12). A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that controls to a specific gaming state (specific jackpot gaming state) to be repeated).
Determining means (game controlling microcomputer 99, SG6 in FIG. 24) for determining the total number of rounds to be repeatedly executed when controlling to the specific gaming state;
Detecting means (first count switch 106) for detecting a game ball won in the variable winning ball device;
The production means is
In the specific gaming state, a prescribed winning number corresponding to a smaller number of rounds than the total number of rounds determined by the determining means is notified in an identifiable manner as an expected winning number (expected number of winnings in an individual period) (( U1)) First effect means (effect control microcomputer 900, SR10 in FIG. 32) for executing the first effect (bonus start effect display);
A first count for counting the number of winnings (individual period winnings) won in the variable winning ball device during the execution of the first effect based on the detection of the game ball by the detecting means during the execution of the first effect. Means (production control microcomputer 900, SS3 in FIG. 31, individual period counter);
First display means (production control microcomputer 900, SS6 in FIG. 31), which displays the number of winnings counted by the first counting means in an identifiable manner (such as (U2) in FIG. 17),
When the number of winnings counted by the first counting means reaches the expected number of winnings notified by the first effect, the first effect is ended and a notification that the specific gaming state continues (FIG. 17). (U5), (U9)) and execute the second effect of notifying the specified number of winnings corresponding to the number of rounds less than the remaining number of unexecuted rounds as the expected number of winnings. Second production means (production control microcomputer 900, SR18 in FIG. 32, ST11 and ST16 in FIG. 34),
A second counter that counts the number of winnings (individual period winnings) won in the variable winning ball device during the execution of the second effect based on the detection of the game ball by the detecting means during the execution of the second effect. Means (production control microcomputer 900, SS3 in FIG. 31, individual period counter);
A second display means (production control microcomputer 900, SS6 in FIG. 31), which displays the number of winnings counted by the second counting means in an identifiable manner (such as (U6) in FIG. 17);
End notification means (effect control microcomputer 900, FIG. 34) for notifying that the specific gaming state is to be ended (bonus end effect display) when there is no remaining number of rounds being executed out of the total number of rounds. ST30)
The second effect means, when there is more than the prescribed number of winnings in the round executed during the first effect (because there is more than the prescribed number of winnings in a certain round during the individual period) When the value of the counter during the individual period becomes “0” during the subsequent round in the individual period), the larger number of winning prizes is added to the expected number of winnings notified in the second effect (FIG. 34). ST11, (U5) in FIG.

  According to such a configuration, the total number of rounds for operating the variable winning ball apparatus in the specific gaming state is determined. Then, a first effect is performed in which a specified number of winnings corresponding to the number of rounds smaller than the determined total number of rounds is informed in an identifiable manner as the expected winning number. Also, when the number of winnings counted by winning the variable winning ball device during execution of the first effect reaches the expected number of winnings notified by the first effect, the first effect is ended and the specific gaming state Is notified, and a second effect is performed in which a specified number of winnings corresponding to the number of rounds less than the remaining number of unexecuted rounds in the total number of rounds is identifiable as the expected number of winnings. In addition, the number of winnings won in the variable winning ball device during execution of the first effect is counted and displayed by the first counting means, and the number of winnings won in the variable winning ball device during the execution of the second effect is counted second. It is counted and displayed by means. Then, when there are more winnings than the prescribed number of winnings in the round executed during the first effect, the larger number of winnings is added to the expected number of winnings notified in the second effect. As a result, even when there are more prizes than the prescribed number of prizes in one round, the second effect is executed even during the round when the expected number of winnings notified by the first effect is reached. Even though the actual number of winnings has reached the expected number of winnings, it is possible to prevent notification that the specific gaming state will continue. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with respect to the relationship between the number of winning prizes and the notification that the specific gaming state continues. Furthermore, when there are more winnings than the prescribed number of winnings in the round executed during the first effect, the larger number of winnings is added to the expected number of winnings notified in the second effect. The expected number of winnings notified by the effect can be matched with the number that can be won in the next second effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with respect to the relationship between the notified expected winning number and the actual number that can be won. Thus, by not giving the player a sense of incongruity regarding the performance in the specific gaming state, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrustful regarding the performance in the specific gaming state.

(2) A variation in which a game is played by placing a game ball into the game area (game area 41), and a plurality of types of identification information (special symbols) that can be distinguished from each other are displayed in a variable manner to display and display the display result The display device (the special symbol display device 44a, the effect display device 44b) and the first state (open state) advantageous for the player who is easy to win the game ball and the game ball is less likely to win the game than the first state. A variable winning ball apparatus (first special variable winning ball apparatus 66) that changes to a second state (closed state) that is disadvantageous to the player, and an effecting means (effect control microcomputer 900) that performs a predetermined effect. And the variable winning ball apparatus is changed from the second state to the first state when the display result of the variable display of the identification information in the variable display device becomes a predetermined specific display result (big hit display result). Are intermittently operated (the opening / closing piece 81 is opened and closed 18 times), and the number of game balls to be awarded to the variable winning ball device in the round is a predetermined prize. When the number reaches 10 (for example, 10), the variable winning ball apparatus is operated to the second state to end the round, and the round is determined a predetermined number of times (for example, 2, 8, 10, 12). A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that controls to a specific gaming state (specific jackpot gaming state) to be repeated).
Determining means (game controlling microcomputer 99, SG6 in FIG. 24) for determining the total number of rounds to be repeatedly executed when controlling to the specific gaming state;
Detecting means (first count switch 106) for detecting a game ball won in the variable winning ball device;
The production means is
In the specific gaming state, a prescribed winning number corresponding to a smaller number of rounds than the total number of rounds determined by the determining means is notified in an identifiable manner as an expected winning number (expected number of winnings in an individual period) (( U1)) First effect means (effect control microcomputer 900, SR10 in FIG. 32) for executing the first effect (bonus start effect display);
A first count for counting the number of winnings (individual period winnings) won in the variable winning ball device during the execution of the first effect based on the detection of the game ball by the detecting means during the execution of the first effect. Means (production control microcomputer 900, SS3 in FIG. 31, individual period counter);
First display means (production control microcomputer 900, SS6 in FIG. 31), which displays the number of winnings counted by the first counting means in an identifiable manner (such as (U2) in FIG. 17),
When the number of winnings counted by the first counting means reaches the expected number of winnings notified by the first effect, the first effect is ended and a notification that the specific gaming state continues (FIG. 17). (U5), (U9)) and execute the second effect of notifying the specified number of winnings corresponding to the number of rounds less than the remaining number of unexecuted rounds as the expected number of winnings. Second production means (production control microcomputer 900, SR18 in FIG. 32, ST11 and ST16 in FIG. 34),
A second counter that counts the number of winnings (individual period winnings) won in the variable winning ball device during the execution of the second effect based on the detection of the game ball by the detecting means during the execution of the second effect. Means (production control microcomputer 900, SS3 in FIG. 31, individual period counter);
A second display means (production control microcomputer 900, SS6 in FIG. 31), which displays the number of winnings counted by the second counting means in an identifiable manner (such as (U6) in FIG. 17);
End notification means for notifying that the specific gaming state is to be ended (bonus end effect display) when there is no remaining number of rounds being executed out of the total number of rounds (the effect control microcomputer 900, FIG. 34 ST30)
Third counting means (production control microcomputer 900, FIG. 5) counts the number of winnings won in the variable winning ball apparatus in the round executed during the execution of the first effect based on the detection of the game ball by the detecting means. 31 SS4, counter during round)
The second effect means is configured such that when the number of winnings counted by the third counting means is greater than the prescribed number of winnings for a round executed during the execution of the first effect (the value of the counter during the round is a prescribed winning of one round). (Ie, when the value of the counter during the individual period becomes “0” in the middle of the round during the individual period), it is added to the expected number of winnings notified by the second effect by the number of winning prizes. (ST11 in FIG. 34, (U5) in FIG. 17).

According to such a configuration, the total number of rounds for operating the variable winning ball apparatus in the specific gaming state is determined. Then, a first effect is performed in which a specified number of winnings corresponding to the number of rounds smaller than the determined total number of rounds is informed in an identifiable manner as the expected number of winnings. Also, when the number of winnings counted by winning the variable winning ball device during execution of the first effect reaches the expected number of winnings notified by the first effect, the first effect is ended and the specific gaming state Is notified, and a second effect is performed in which a specified number of winnings corresponding to the number of rounds less than the remaining number of unexecuted rounds in the total number of rounds is identifiable as the expected number of winnings. In addition, the number of winnings won in the variable winning ball device during execution of the first effect is counted and displayed by the first counting means, and the number of winnings won in the variable winning ball device during the execution of the second effect is counted second. It is counted and displayed by means. Then, the number of winnings won in the variable winning ball apparatus in the round executed during the execution of the first effect is counted by the third counting means. Further, when the number of winnings counted by the third counting means is larger than the prescribed number of winnings in the round executed during the execution of the first effect, the expected number of winnings notified by the second effect by the larger number of winning prizes. Is added. As a result, even when there are more prizes than the prescribed number of prizes in one round, the second effect is executed even during the round when the expected number of winnings notified by the first effect is reached. Even though the actual number of winnings has reached the expected number of winnings, it is possible to prevent notification that the specific gaming state will continue. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with respect to the relationship between the number of winning prizes and the notification that the specific gaming state continues. Further, when the number of winnings counted by the third counting means is larger than the prescribed number of winnings in the round executed during the execution of the first effect, the larger number of winnings is added to the expected number of winnings notified in the second effect. Therefore, the expected number of winnings notified in the next second effect can be matched to the number that can be won in the period in which the next second effect is performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with respect to the relationship between the notified expected winning number and the actual number that can be won. Thus, by not giving the player a sense of incongruity regarding the performance in the specific gaming state, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrustful regarding the performance in the specific gaming state.

(3) A variation in which a game is played by placing a game ball into the game area (game area 41), and a plurality of types of identification information (special symbols) that can be distinguished from each other are displayed in a variable manner so that a display result is derived and displayed. The display device (the special symbol display device 44a, the effect display device 44b) and the first state (open state) advantageous for the player who is easy to win the game ball and the game ball is less likely to win the game than the first state. A variable winning ball apparatus (first special variable winning ball apparatus 66) that changes to a second state (closed state) that is disadvantageous to the player, and an effecting means (effect control microcomputer 900) that performs a predetermined effect. And the variable winning ball apparatus is changed from the second state to the first state when the display result of the variable display of the identification information in the variable display device becomes a predetermined specific display result (big hit display result). Are intermittently operated (the opening / closing piece 81 is opened and closed 18 times), and the number of game balls to be awarded to the variable winning ball device in the round is a predetermined prize. When the number reaches 10 (for example, 10), the variable winning ball apparatus is operated to the second state to end the round, and the round is determined a predetermined number of times (for example, 2, 8, 10, 12). A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that controls to a specific gaming state (specific jackpot gaming state) to be repeated).
Determining means (game controlling microcomputer 99, SG6 in FIG. 24) for determining the total number of rounds to be repeatedly executed when controlling to the specific gaming state;
Detecting means (first count switch 106) for detecting a game ball won in the variable winning ball device;
The production means is
In the specific gaming state, a prescribed winning number corresponding to a smaller number of rounds than the total number of rounds determined by the determining means is notified in an identifiable manner as a winning expected number (expected number of winnings for an individual period) ((FIG. 37 ( W1)) First effect means (effect control microcomputer 900, SR10 in FIG. 39) for executing the first effect (bonus start effect display);
A first count for counting the number of winnings (individual period winnings) won in the variable winning ball device during the execution of the first effect based on the detection of the game ball by the detecting means during the execution of the first effect. Means (production control microcomputer 900, SS3 in FIG. 38, individual period counter),
A first display means (production control microcomputer 900, SS6 in FIG. 38) for displaying the number of winnings counted by the first counting means in an identifiable manner (such as (W2) in FIG. 37);
When the number of winnings counted by the first counting means reaches the expected number of winnings notified by the first effect, the first effect is ended and a notification that the specific gaming state continues (FIG. 37). (W5), (W7), (W9)), and the specified number of winnings corresponding to the number of rounds less than the remaining number of unexecuted rounds out of the total number of rounds is notified in an identifiable manner 2nd production means (execution control microcomputer 900, SR18 in FIG. 39, ST10b, ST16, ST10a in FIG. 40, SS2a in FIG. 38) for executing 2 productions;
A second counter that counts the number of winnings (individual period winnings) won in the variable winning ball device during the execution of the second effect based on the detection of the game ball by the detecting means during the execution of the second effect. Means (production control microcomputer 900, SS3 in FIG. 38, individual period counter),
Second display means (production control microcomputer 900, SS6 in FIG. 38), which displays the number of winnings counted by the second counting means in an identifiable manner (eg, (W7) in FIG. 37);
When there is no remaining number of rounds in the total number of rounds, the end notification means (the effect control microcomputer 900, FIG. 40) that notifies the end of the specific gaming state (bonus end effect display). ST30)
When the round executed during the execution of the first effect is completed from when the number of winnings counted by the first counting unit reaches the expected number of winnings notified by the first effect. Until the specific gaming state continues (ST10b in FIG. 40, SR18 in FIG. 39, (W5) to (W7) in FIG. 37), and counting the number of winnings by the second counting means. Prohibited (ST10a in FIG. 40, SS2a in FIG. 38, (W5) in FIG. 37).

  According to such a configuration, the total number of rounds for operating the variable winning ball apparatus in the specific gaming state is determined. Then, a first effect is performed in which a specified number of winnings corresponding to the number of rounds smaller than the determined total number of rounds is informed in an identifiable manner as the expected winning number. Also, when the number of winnings counted by winning the variable winning ball device during execution of the first effect reaches the expected number of winnings notified by the first effect, the first effect is ended and the specific gaming state Is notified, and a second effect is performed in which a specified number of winnings corresponding to the number of rounds less than the remaining number of unexecuted rounds in the total number of rounds is identifiable as the expected number of winnings. In addition, the number of winnings won in the variable winning ball device during execution of the first effect is counted and displayed by the first counting means, and the number of winnings won in the variable winning ball device during the execution of the second effect is counted second. It is counted and displayed by means. Then, when the second effect is executed, when the round executed during the execution of the first effect ends from when the number of winnings counted by the first counting means reaches the expected number of winnings notified by the first effect. Until this time, the notification that the specific gaming state continues is continued, and the counting of the number of winnings by the second counting means is prohibited. As a result, when there are more winnings than the prescribed number of winnings in one round and the expected number of winnings notified by the first effect is reached in the middle of the round, Until the round executed during the execution of the first effect ends, the notification that the specific gaming state continues is continued. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the notification that the specific gaming state will continue even if the actual number of winnings has reached the expected number of winnings. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with respect to the relationship between the number of winning prizes and the notification that the specific gaming state continues. In addition, counting of the number of winnings by the second counting means is prohibited from the time when the expected number of winnings notified by the first effect is reached to the time when the round executed during the execution of the first effect ends. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable regarding the relationship between the notified expected winning number and the actual winning number. Thus, by not giving the player a sense of incongruity regarding the performance in the specific gaming state, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrustful regarding the performance in the specific gaming state.

(4) A variation in which a game is played by hitting a game ball (game region 41) and a plurality of types of identification information (special symbols) that can be distinguished from each other are displayed in a variable manner and the display result is derived and displayed. The display device (the special symbol display device 44a, the effect display device 44b) and the first state (open state) advantageous for the player who is easy to win the game ball and the game ball is less likely to win the game than the first state. A variable winning ball apparatus (first special variable winning ball apparatus 66) that changes to a second state (closed state) that is disadvantageous to the player, and an effecting means (effect control microcomputer 900) that performs a predetermined effect. And the variable winning ball apparatus is changed from the second state to the first state when the display result of the variable display of the identification information in the variable display device becomes a predetermined specific display result (big hit display result). Are intermittently operated (the opening / closing piece 81 is opened and closed 18 times), and the number of game balls to be awarded to the variable winning ball device in the round is a predetermined prize. When the number reaches 10 (for example, 10), the variable winning ball apparatus is operated to the second state to end the round, and the round is determined a predetermined number of times (for example, 2, 8, 10, 12). A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that controls to a specific gaming state (specific jackpot gaming state) to be repeated).
Determining means (game controlling microcomputer 99, SG6 in FIG. 24) for determining the total number of rounds to be repeatedly executed when controlling to the specific gaming state;
Detecting means (first count switch 106) for detecting a game ball won in the variable winning ball device;
The production means is
In the specific gaming state, a specified winning number corresponding to a smaller number of rounds than the total number of rounds determined by the determining means is notified in an identifiable manner as an expected winning number (expected number of winnings for an individual period) (( X1)) First effect means (effect control microcomputer 900, SR10 in FIG. 39) for executing the first effect (bonus start effect display);
A first count for counting the number of winnings (individual period winnings) won in the variable winning ball device during the execution of the first effect based on the detection of the game ball by the detecting means during the execution of the first effect. Means (production control microcomputer 900, SS3 in FIG. 44, individual period counter),
First display means (production control microcomputer 900, SS6 in FIG. 44), which displays the number of winnings counted by the first counting means in an identifiable manner (such as (X2) in FIG. 43);
When the round executed during the execution of the first effect ends, the first effect is ended and the fact that the specific gaming state is continued is notified ((X6), (X9) in FIG. 43). The second effect means (the effect control micro) for executing the second effect of notifying the specified number of winnings corresponding to the number of rounds less than or equal to the remaining number of unexecuted rounds as the expected number of winnings. Computer 900, SR18 in FIG. 39, ST10c and ST16 in FIG. 45, SS2a and SS7 in FIG. 38),
A second counter that counts the number of winnings (individual period winnings) won in the variable winning ball device during the execution of the second effect based on the detection of the game ball by the detecting means during the execution of the second effect. Means (production control microcomputer 900, SS3 in FIG. 44, individual period counter),
A second display means (production control microcomputer 900, SS6 in FIG. 44), which displays the number of winnings counted by the second counting means in an identifiable manner (such as (X6) in FIG. 43);
An end notification means (effect control microcomputer 900, FIG. 45) for notifying that the specific gaming state is to be ended (bonus end effect display) when there is no remaining number of rounds being executed among the total number of rounds. ST30)
The first display means ends when the round executed during the execution of the first effect ends from when the number of winnings counted by the first counting means reaches the expected number of winnings notified by the first effect. Until each time the number of winning prizes is counted by the first counting means, an image that can identify the winning is displayed instead of the display that can identify the winning number (FIG. 45).
ST10c, SS7 in FIG. 44, (X5) in FIG. 43).

  According to such a configuration, the total number of rounds for operating the variable winning ball apparatus in the specific gaming state is determined. Then, a first effect is performed in which a specified number of winnings corresponding to the number of rounds smaller than the determined total number of rounds is informed in an identifiable manner as the expected winning number. In addition, when the round executed during the execution of the first effect ends, the fact that the first effect is ended and the specific gaming state continues is notified, and the remaining unexecuted of the total number of rounds. A second effect is performed in which a specified number of winnings corresponding to the number of rounds equal to or less than the number of rounds is specified and notified as an expected number of winnings. In addition, the number of winnings won in the variable winning ball device during execution of the first effect is counted and displayed by the first counting means, and the number of winnings won in the variable winning ball device during the execution of the second effect is counted second. It is counted and displayed by means. When the second effect is executed, the round executed during the execution of the first effect ends from when the number of winnings counted by the first counting means reaches the expected number of winnings notified by the first effect. Until then, each time the number of winning prizes is counted by the first counting means, an image capable of specifying the winning is displayed instead of displaying the winning number. As a result, when there are more winnings than the prescribed number of winnings in one round and the expected number of winnings notified by the first effect is reached in the middle of the round, Every time the number of winnings is counted by the first counting means until the end of the round executed during the execution of the first effect, the fact that there was a winning instead of a display that can identify the winning number is indicated. An identifiable image is displayed. In this way, every time the number of winnings is counted by the first counting means, instead of displaying that the number of winnings can be specified, an image that can specify that there has been a winning is displayed, so that the specific gaming state Is not directly informed, but can be suggested. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with respect to the relationship between the number of winning prizes and the notification that the specific gaming state continues. In addition, by displaying an image that can specify that there has been a prize, the round executed during the execution of the first effect from the time when the expected number of winnings informed by the first effect is reached. Since the display that can identify the number of winnings is not performed until the time is reached, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with respect to the relationship between the notified expected winning number and the actual winning number. Thus, by not giving the player a sense of incongruity regarding the performance in the specific gaming state, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrustful regarding the performance in the specific gaming state.

(5) A game in which a game ball is shot into the game area (game area 41), and a variation in which a plurality of types of identification information (special symbols) that can be identified are displayed in a variable manner and a display result is derived and displayed. The display device (the special symbol display device 44a, the effect display device 44b) and the first state (open state) advantageous for the player who is easy to win the game ball and the game ball is less likely to win the game than the first state. A variable winning ball apparatus (first special variable winning ball apparatus 66) that changes to a second state (closed state) that is disadvantageous to the player, and an effecting means (effect control microcomputer 900) that performs a predetermined effect. And the variable winning ball apparatus is changed from the second state to the first state when the display result of the variable display of the identification information in the variable display device becomes a predetermined specific display result (big hit display result). Are intermittently operated (the opening / closing piece 81 is opened and closed 18 times), and the number of game balls to be awarded to the variable winning ball device in the round is a predetermined prize. When the number reaches 10 (for example, 10), the variable winning ball apparatus is operated to the second state to end the round, and the round is determined a predetermined number of times (for example, 2, 8, 10, 12). A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that controls to a specific gaming state (specific jackpot gaming state) to be repeated).
Determining means (game controlling microcomputer 99, SG6 in FIG. 24) for determining the total number of rounds to be repeatedly executed when controlling to the specific gaming state;
Detecting means (first count switch 106) for detecting a game ball won in the variable winning ball device;
The production means is
In the specific gaming state, a prescribed winning number corresponding to a smaller number of rounds than the total number of rounds determined by the determining means is notified in an identifiable manner as a winning expected number (expected number of winnings for an individual period) (( Y1), (Y11) in FIG. 50) First effect means (microcomputer 900 for effect control, SR10 in FIG. 51, SR10 in FIG. 54) for executing the first effect (bonus start effect display);
A first count for counting the number of winnings (individual period winnings) won in the variable winning ball device during the execution of the first effect based on the detection of the game ball by the detecting means during the execution of the first effect. Means (production control microcomputer 900, SS3 in FIG. 31, individual period counter);
The number of winnings counted by the first counting means is displayed in an identifiable manner ((Y2) in FIG. 49, (Y12) in FIG. 50, etc.). First display means (production control microcomputer 900, SS6 in FIG. 31) ,
When the number of winnings counted by the first counting means reaches the expected number of winnings notified by the first effect, the first effect is ended and a notification that the specific gaming state continues (FIG. 49). (Y3), (Y13) of FIG. 50, etc.), and the specified number of winnings corresponding to the number of rounds less than the remaining number of unexecuted rounds among the total number of rounds is notified in an identifiable manner as the expected number of winnings 2nd production means (microcomputer 900 for production control, SR18 of FIG. 51, SR18 of FIG. 54, ST11 of FIG. 52) which performs 2 productions,
A second counter that counts the number of winnings (individual period winnings) won in the variable winning ball device during the execution of the second effect based on the detection of the game ball by the detecting means during the execution of the second effect. Means (production control microcomputer 900, SS3 in FIG. 31, individual period counter);
The number of winnings counted by the second counting means is displayed in an identifiable manner ((Y4) in FIG. 49, (Y14) in FIG. 50, etc.) and the second display means (production control microcomputer 900, SS6 in FIG. 31); ,
An end notifying means (effect control microcomputer 900, FIG. 52) for notifying that the specific gaming state is to be ended (bonus end effect display) when there is no remaining round number of the total rounds being executed. ST30)
The first effect means informs the expected number of winnings set as the expected number of winnings, which is set to a number larger than the prescribed number of winnings corresponding to the number of rounds in which the first effect is executed (SR7, SR7a in FIG. 51, SR7, SR7a in FIG. 54, (Y4) in FIG. 49, (Y14) in FIG. 50).

According to such a configuration, the total number of rounds for operating the variable winning ball apparatus in the specific gaming state is determined. Then, a first effect is performed in which a specified number of winnings corresponding to the number of rounds smaller than the determined total number of rounds is informed in an identifiable manner as the expected number of winnings. Also, when the number of winnings counted by winning the variable winning ball device during execution of the first effect reaches the expected number of winnings notified by the first effect, the first effect is ended and the specific gaming state Is notified, and a second effect is performed in which a specified number of winnings corresponding to the number of rounds less than the remaining number of unexecuted rounds in the total number of rounds is identifiable as the expected number of winnings. In addition, the number of winnings won in the variable winning ball device during execution of the first effect is counted and displayed by the first counting means, and the number of winnings won in the variable winning ball device during the execution of the second effect is counted second. It is counted and displayed by means. As the expected number of winnings notified by the first effect, the expected number of winnings set to a number larger than the prescribed number of winnings corresponding to the number of rounds in which the first effect is executed is notified. This makes it possible to prevent the expected number of winnings notified by the first effect from reaching the expected number of winnings even when there are more than the prescribed number of winnings in one round. It is possible to prevent a situation in which notification that the specific gaming state will continue is not performed despite the fact that the number has been reached. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with respect to the relationship between the number of winning prizes and the notification that the specific gaming state continues. As described above, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with respect to the performance in the specific gaming state, so that the player is not distrusted with respect to the performance in the specific gaming state. It becomes possible.

  (6) When the round executed during execution of the first effect ends, the second effect means sets the winning number counted by the first counting means to the expected number of winnings notified by the first effect. Even when it has not reached, the second effect is executed (ST11 in FIG. 34, (Y3) in FIG. 49, (Y15) in FIG. 50, etc.)).

  According to such a configuration, the round executed during the execution of the first effect ends when the number of winnings counted by the first counting means has not reached the expected number of winnings notified by the first effect. However, since the second effect is executed, the expected number of winnings generated due to the fact that the expected number of winnings to be notified is set to be larger than the prescribed number of winnings corresponding to the number of rounds in which the first effect is executed. It is possible to prevent the error from affecting the next second performance.

(7) A variation in which a game is played by placing a game ball into the game area (game area 41), and a plurality of types of identification information (special symbols) that can be distinguished from each other are displayed in a variable manner so that a display result is derived and displayed. The display device (the special symbol display device 44a, the effect display device 44b) and the first state (open state) advantageous for the player who is easy to win the game ball and the game ball is less likely to win the game than the first state. A variable winning ball apparatus (first special variable winning ball apparatus 66) that changes to a second state (closed state) that is disadvantageous to the player, and an effecting means (effect control microcomputer 900) that performs a predetermined effect. And the variable winning ball apparatus is changed from the second state to the first state when the display result of the variable display of the identification information in the variable display device becomes a predetermined specific display result (big hit display result). Are intermittently operated (the opening / closing piece 81 is opened and closed 18 times), and the number of game balls to be awarded to the variable winning ball device in the round is a predetermined prize. When the number reaches 10 (for example, 10), the variable winning ball apparatus is operated to the second state to end the round, and the round is determined a predetermined number of times (for example, 2, 8, 10, 12). A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that controls to a specific gaming state (specific jackpot gaming state) to be repeated).
Determining means (game controlling microcomputer 99, SG6 in FIG. 24) for determining the total number of rounds to be repeatedly executed when controlling to the specific gaming state;
Detecting means (first count switch 106) for detecting a game ball won in the variable winning ball device;
The production means is
In the specific gaming state, a specified number of winnings corresponding to a smaller number of rounds than the total number of rounds determined by the determining means is notified as an expected winning number (expected number of winnings for an individual period) so as to be specified (( Z1)) First effect means (microcomputer 900 for effect control, SR10 in FIG. 39) for executing the first effect (bonus start effect display);
A first count for counting the number of winnings (individual period winnings) won in the variable winning ball device during the execution of the first effect based on the detection of the game ball by the detecting means during the execution of the first effect. Means (production control microcomputer 900, SS3 in FIG. 57) individual period counter),
A first display means (production control microcomputer 900, SS6 in FIG. 57), which displays the number of winnings counted by the first counting means in an identifiable manner (eg, (Z2) in FIG. 56);
When the number of winnings counted by the first counting means reaches the expected number of winnings notified by the first effect, the first effect is ended and a notification that the specific gaming state continues (FIG. 56). (Z8), (Z10)) and execute the second effect of notifying the specified number of winnings corresponding to the number of remaining rounds which is not executed among the total number of rounds as the expected number of winnings. Second presentation means (production control microcomputer 900, SR18 in FIG. 39, ST16 in FIG. 58),
A second counter that counts the number of winnings (individual period winnings) won in the variable winning ball device during the execution of the second effect based on the detection of the game ball by the detecting means during the execution of the second effect. Means (production control microcomputer 900, SS3 in FIG. 57, individual period counter),
A second display means (production control microcomputer 900, SS6 in FIG. 57) that displays the number of winnings counted by the second counting means in an identifiable manner (such as (Z9) in FIG. 56);
An end notifying means (effect control microcomputer 900, FIG. 58) for notifying that the specific gaming state is to be ended (bonus end effect display) when there is no remaining number of rounds being executed out of the total number of rounds. ST30) and
Third counting means (effect control) for counting the number of winnings (the number of winnings during the round) won in the variable winning ball device in the round executed during execution of the first effect based on the detection of the game ball by the detecting means. Microcomputer 900, SS4 of FIG. 57, counter during round),
When the number of winnings counted by the third counting unit exceeds the prescribed number of winnings in the round, the first counting unit stops counting by the larger number of winnings (ST10e to ST10h in FIG. 58). , SS2c to SS2e in FIG. 57, (Z3) to (Z6) in FIG. 56).

According to such a configuration, the total number of rounds for operating the variable winning ball apparatus in the specific gaming state is determined. Then, a first effect is performed in which a specified number of winnings corresponding to the number of rounds smaller than the determined total number of rounds is informed in an identifiable manner as the expected number of winnings. Also, when the number of winnings counted by winning the variable winning ball device during execution of the first effect reaches the expected number of winnings notified by the first effect, the first effect is ended and the specific gaming state Is notified, and a second effect is performed in which a specified number of winnings corresponding to the number of rounds less than the remaining number of unexecuted rounds in the total number of rounds is identifiable as the expected number of winnings. In addition, the number of winnings won in the variable winning ball device during execution of the first effect is counted and displayed by the first counting means, and the number of winnings won in the variable winning ball device during the execution of the second effect is counted second. It is counted and displayed by means. In addition, the number of winnings won in the variable winning ball apparatus in the round executed during the execution of the first effect is counted by the third counting means. And
When the number of winnings counted by the third counting means becomes larger than the prescribed number of winnings in the round, the counting by the first counting means is stopped by the larger number of winning prizes. As a result, even when the number of winnings counted by the third counting means exceeds the prescribed number of winnings in the round, the counting by the first counting means is stopped by the larger number of winning prizes, so the first counting means It is possible to prevent the notification that the specific gaming state will continue even though the number of winnings counted and displayed has reached the expected winning number. Therefore, when the notification that the specific gaming state is continued is made, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with respect to the relationship between the notified expected winning number and the displayed winning number. Thus, by not giving the player a sense of incongruity regarding the performance in the specific gaming state, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrustful regarding the performance in the specific gaming state.

(8) During the execution of the first effect, a plurality of rounds are executed (FIG. 55),
When the number of winnings counted by the third counting unit is greater than the prescribed number of winnings in the round (YES in ST10e in FIG. 58), the first counting unit only increases the number of winnings (ST10f in FIG. 58). , ST10g), and stops counting in the next round of the current round (SS2d, SS2e in FIG. 57).

  According to such a configuration, when the number of winnings counted by the third counting means becomes larger than the prescribed number of winnings in the round, the first counting is performed in the next round of the round by the amount of the larger winning number. Since the counting by the means is stopped, the relationship between the number of winnings counted by the third counting means being larger than the prescribed number of winnings of the round and the counting being stopped by the first counting means Can be made difficult for the player to notice.

(9) Notification time selection means for selecting whether the effect means performs notification that the specific gaming state is continued by the second effect means in a period between rounds or in a period during a round ( Further includes SR7) of FIG.
The second effect means notifies that the specific gaming state is continued in the period selected by the notification time selection means (SV1 to SV5 in FIG. 33).

  According to such a configuration, it is selected whether the notification that the specific gaming state is continued by the second effect means is performed in the period between rounds or in the period during the round, and in the selected period Since the notification is made, it is possible to enrich the variation of the production and improve the interest of the player.

  (10) When the period during the round is selected as the period for performing the notification by the notification timing selection unit, the first effect unit does not become a multiple of the prescribed winning number in one round as the expected number of winnings. The value is notified (for example, in the round lottery data pattern No. 7 in FIG. 8 or the like, a value that is not a multiple of the prescribed winning number of one round such as “22” is notified).

  According to such a configuration, when the notification that the specific gaming state is continued by the second effect means is selected during the period of the round, the expected number of winnings is a multiple of the prescribed winning number in one round. Since a value that does not become informed is notified, it is possible to notify the expected number of winnings corresponding to performing notification during the round.

(11) Selection pattern data storage means in which the effect means stores a plurality of types of data (bonus continuation pattern data in FIGS. 7 to 11) indicating selection patterns of expected winning numbers in the first effect and the second effect. (ROM 901 of the production control microcomputer 900);
Determination of expected number of winnings for determining expected number of winnings to be notified in the first effect and the second effect by selecting data indicating a selection pattern from a plurality of types of data stored in the selection pattern data storage means Means (SR7 in FIG. 32, etc.),
The data stored in the selection pattern data storage means is notified in the second effect when a value that is not a multiple of the prescribed winning number in one round is selected as the expected number of winnings to be notified in the first effect. The selection pattern is set so that the expected winning number is set to a value that is selected as a value that is not a multiple of the specified winning number, and is higher than a ratio that is not selected as a value that is not a multiple of the specified winning number (for example, 8, once a value that is not a multiple of the specified number of winnings in one round is notified as in pattern Nos. 7, 8, 10, 11, 13, and 14 in FIG. A value that is not a multiple of the number is reported).

According to such a configuration, when a value that is not a multiple of the specified number of winnings in one round is selected as the expected number of winnings to be notified in the first effect, the expected number of winnings to be notified in the second effect is the specified number of winnings. Since the selection pattern is set so that the ratio selected for a value that is not a multiple is higher than the ratio that is not selected for a value that is not a multiple of the specified winning number, it is not a multiple of the specified winning number in one round. When the value is notified as the expected number of winnings, a value that is not a multiple of the prescribed winning number is likely to be continuously notified as the expected number of winnings a plurality of times. When a value that is not a multiple of the prescribed number of winnings in one round is first notified as the expected winning number, the player easily recognizes that the notified expected winning number does not correspond to the value at the end of the round. Therefore, the player can easily grasp that the specific gaming state continues. However, if such a value that does not become a multiple of the specified number of winnings in one round is continuously notified several times, it is determined whether or not the total value of the expected number of winnings is a multiple of the specified number of winnings in one round. Is difficult to recognize, so it is difficult for the player to grasp whether or not the specific gaming state continues. In addition, when a value that is not a multiple of the specified number of winnings in one round is notified a plurality of times as the expected number of winnings, the total value of the expected winning numbers to be notified can be adjusted to a multiple of the specified number of winnings in one round. Thus, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with respect to the relationship between the notified expected winning number and the actual number that can be won.

  Embodiments of the present invention will be described below in detail with reference to the drawings. In the following embodiment, a gaming machine in which a player plays a game with a hand directly in the hand is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example, an enclosed type in which a gaming ball is enclosed in the gaming machine A variable display device that may be a gaming machine or the like, and a game is performed by driving a game ball into the game area, and a plurality of types of identification information that can be individually identified are displayed in a variable manner and a display result is derived and displayed; A variable winning ball apparatus that changes between a first state that is advantageous for a player who is easy to receive game balls and a second state that is disadvantageous for a player who is difficult to receive game balls compared to the first state, When the display result of the variation display of the identification information in the variation display device becomes a predetermined specific display result, the variable winning ball apparatus is controlled from the second state to the first state in a predetermined start mode. The variable winning ball apparatus Based on that approach the game ball enters the specified entry area, as long as the gaming machine to control the advantageous specific gaming state to the player, may be any gaming machine.

[First Embodiment]
First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 1 that is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment as seen from the front.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame 2 that is formed into a vertically long frame, and is pivotally supported on one side of the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable. Are formed from a front frame 3 that is provided in a collective manner. In the front frame 3, a front door frame 4 is provided at the upper front portion so as to be opened and closed, and an upper dish opening / closing frame 11 is provided at the lower front portion so as to be opened and closed. In addition to the front door frame 4 and the upper plate opening / closing frame 11, the main components provided in the front frame 3 include the game board 40, lower plate 27, operation handle 30, mechanism plate (not shown), hitting ball There is a launcher 130 (not shown in FIG. 1 and shown in FIG. 2). Although not shown, a card unit device 128 (see FIG. 2) for lending a game ball to a player (lending the ball) to the side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be attached. .

  The front door frame 4 is provided with a circular see-through window 5 as a game opening through which a game area 41 of a game board 40 to be described later can be substantially seen through, and a multilayer glass plate is mounted from the back surface of the circular see-through window 5. It has become. The circular see-through window 5 and the multilayer glass plate are both formed in a vertically long circular shape. At the periphery of the front door frame 4, reinforcing peripheral frame ribs (not shown) are erected rearward, and further, by attaching reinforcing metal fittings with mounting screws along the reinforcing peripheral frame ribs, The strength is improved.

Further, on the front side of the front door frame 4, along the outer periphery of the circular see-through window 5, an upper decorative unit 22 as a decorative member is disposed on the upper side, and a left decorative unit 23 as a covering member is disposed on the left side. A right decorative unit 24 as a covering member is provided, and a lower decorative unit 25 as a front component is provided at the lower part. The upper decorative unit 22 is provided on the front side of the front door frame 4 so that game effect LEDs (Light Emitting Diodes) 13, 14a, 14c and game effect lamps 14b, 14d as light emitting members face the left decorative unit. 23 and the right decoration unit 24 are provided on the front side of the front door frame 4 so that game effect lamps 16a and 16b and game effect lamps 17a and 17b as light emitting members face, respectively. The game effect LEDs 13, 14a, 14c, game effect lamps 14b, 14d, 16a, 16b
, 17a, 17b are lit or flashed in accordance with the gaming state, informing the player of the occurrence or continuation of a special gaming state and increasing the gaming atmosphere. Note that the special gaming state in the present embodiment refers to a gaming state such as a big hit gaming state described later.

  In addition, speakers 12 a and 12 b that generate sound effects (including sound and the like) according to the progress of the game are provided on the front door frame 4 on the left and right of the upper decoration unit 22. Note that the speakers 12a and 12b also generate a notification sound to notify that when a ball lending abnormality occurs or when a ball lends (for example, a ball worth 100 yen is paid out). May be. In addition, a prize ball LED 10 as a game-related information light emitting member for notifying that a predetermined number of prize balls have been paid out on the right side of the upper part of the left decoration unit 23 based on the occurrence of a winning ball (the prize ball unpaid portion) In particular, it is turned on when there is unpaid prize ball, and is turned off when there is no unpaid prize ball) so that it can be seen from the front of the front door frame 4. On the left side of the upper part of the right decoration unit 24, a ball break LED 9 as a game-related information light emitting member for notifying that there are not enough prize balls to be paid out is provided so as to be visible from the front surface of the front door frame 4. The award ball LED 10 and the ball break LED 9 are game-related information light-emitting members that emit light related to information related to the game separately from the game effects performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and are provided separately from the game effect LED and the game effect lamp. It is provided on the front side of the front frame 3.

  The game effect LEDs 13, 14 a, 14 c and the game effect lamps 14 b, 14 d, 16 a, 16 b, 17 a, 17 b are mounted on a printed wiring board (not shown) and attached to the front side of the front frame 3. A plurality of game effect LEDs 13, 14a, 14c and game effect lamps 16a, 16b, 17a, 17b are mounted on each printed circuit board, and one game effect lamp 14b, 14d is mounted on each printed circuit board. Has been. And each board | substrate and speaker 12a, 12b are connected to the audio | voice frame lamp board | substrate 92 mentioned later. On the other hand, a plurality of ball-out LEDs 9 and prize ball LEDs 10 are mounted on each printed circuit board, and are connected to a payout control board 98 described later.

  Next, the structure of the upper plate 19 formed in the upper plate opening / closing frame 11 located below the see-through window 5 of the front door frame 4 will be described. The upper plate 19 is configured by fixing a plate member in which a plurality of synthetic resin members are combined. Above the open side of the upper plate 19, a ball removal operation unit 21 is provided. This beading operation unit 21 is provided so as to be capable of pressing operation, and is pressed against the urging force of the spring to thereby form a beading path (not shown) formed on the back side of the ball stored in the upper plate 19. ) And a ball removal hole (not shown) flow down and are guided to the lower plate 27.

  The above-described upper plate 19 will be described in more detail. The upper plate 19 stores the prize balls paid out from the prize ball payout opening 20 formed on the upstream side thereof, and supplies the balls to the launch position. is there. Further, the upper plate 19 is provided with an operation unit (balance display unit) that is operated when borrowing a ball through a card unit device 128 provided adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1. The operation unit includes a balance display board 104 on which a ball rental switch, a return switch, and display LEDs (both not shown) are mounted. The balance display board 104 faces the upper surface of the upper plate 19. Yes.

The lower tray 27 attached to the lower portion of the front frame 3 is an excess sphere storage tray (surplus sphere receiving tray) that stores excess spheres overflowing from the upper tray 19. An operation lever 28 is slidably attached. By operating the ball removal operation lever 28, the balls (prize balls) stored in the lower plate 27 can be removed and transferred to a portable ball box. Further, an ashtray unit 29 is provided on the left side of the lower plate 27, and an operation handle 30 is provided on the right side. The operation handle 30 is assembled with a single firing switch for stopping the driving of a firing motor of a ball striking device 130 to be described later and a touch wiring (not shown) connected to a touch ring (touch sensor). It adjusts the force. In response to operation of the operation handle 30, a game ball is bullet-launched from the hit ball launching device 130, and the shot game ball (hit ball) is shot into the game area 41.

  The front structure of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is generally as described above, but the case where the card unit device 128 is adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. The card unit device 128 is operated by operating an operation unit such as the above-described ball rental switch or return switch provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 19. Thus, on the front side of the card unit device 128, a usable indicator (not shown) for displaying whether or not the card unit device 128 is usable, and the card unit device 128 corresponds to the pachinko gaming machine 1 on either side. A connection direction indicator (not shown) for indicating whether or not a card is inserted and a card insertion slot (not shown) for inserting a magnetic card as a recording medium are provided. The card unit device 128 configured as described above is controlled by a unique control circuit, and is connected to a payout control board 98 to be described later via a card unit wiring. The card unit device 128 may be built in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or may be a ball game machine that does not have the card unit device 128 and has no card lending function. Moreover, in this embodiment, although the card unit apparatus 128 was illustrated as a unit apparatus for lending a ball | bowl to a player (lending a ball | bowl), the unit apparatus which can insert a banknote etc. may be sufficient, for example.

  The schematic configuration of the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been described above, but the detailed configuration of the gaming board 40 among the components configuring the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described below.

  First, referring to FIG. 1, the game board 40 is formed of a substantially square plywood so as to be housed and fixed in a game board housing frame portion integrally formed on the back surface side of the front frame 3. . On the surface of the game board 40, guide rails 42a and 42b each having a stainless steel plate formed in an arc shape are attached. Thereby, the game ball launched from the hitting ball launching device 130 is guided into the circular game area 41 formed by each of the guide rails 42a and 42b. In this way, a game ball is shot into the game area 41.

  In the game area 41, a special symbol display device 44a, an effect display device 44b, a first special variable winning ball device 66, a second special variable winning ball device 48, a normal variable winning ball device 58, a normal symbol display device 63, and the like are provided. In addition, a winning opening for simply winning the game ball, a windmill flow direction, a windmill for changing the speed, and a number of obstacle nails (not shown) are provided. An out port 69 for taking in a game ball that does not win in the winning area is also provided.

  The configuration of the game area 41 will be described in more detail. A passing gate 61 incorporating a gate switch 62 is provided on the left side of the normal variable winning ball device 58. The gate switch 62 is a normal symbol display device 63 provided on the right side of the second special variable winning ball device 48 based on the detection signal when a game ball passing through the gate switch 62 is detected. Normal display as multiple types of identifiable identification information is variably displayed (specifically, “O” and “X” are alternately lit in two places at the top and bottom) to derive the display results ( (Either “O” or “X” is lit) In other words, when “x” is lit on the normal symbol display device 63, the normal symbol display device 63 has derived a display result of detachment. On the other hand, when “◯” is lit on the normal symbol display device 63, the normal symbol display device 63 has derived the winning display result, and the normal variable winning ball device 58 is opened for a predetermined time.

The normal symbol display time on the normal symbol display device 63 (hereinafter referred to as “variation time”) is the time of the normal game state set in advance and the time-short state shortened from the normal game state as will be described later. It differs from time to time. The normal symbol variation time is set to a relatively long normal variation time (for example, 30 seconds) in the normal gaming state, and a relatively short shortened variation time (for example, 3 to 5 seconds) in the short time state. Set to Also, the opening time of the normally variable winning ball device 58 is different between the normal game state and the short time state. The opening time of the normally variable winning ball apparatus 58 is set to a relatively short normal opening time (for example, 0.5 seconds) in the normal gaming state, and a relatively long extended opening time (to be described later). For example, it is set to 2 seconds. Further, the ordinary variable winning ball device 58 is configured to receive a game ball from the start port 58a provided at the upper part of the ordinary variable winning ball device 58 even when it is not opened.

  Further, on the left side of the second special variable winning ball device 48, the number of game balls passed through the gate switch 62 during the variable display of the normal symbol display device 63 or during the opening of the normal variable winning ball device 58 is stored and displayed. A symbol start memory LED 64 (stores and displays up to four) is provided. The normal symbol start memory LED 64 is composed of four LEDs.

  Further, the special symbol start memory LED 46 stores and displays the number of balls detected by a start port switch 60 (to be described later) during the special symbol changing operation or the big hit gaming state (stores and displays up to four balls). The special symbol start memory LED 46 is composed of four LEDs. In addition, in the special symbol start memory LED 46, the upper limit value of the start memory number is set to a constant four, but this is not limiting, and the upper limit value of the start memory number can be changed when a predetermined condition is established. It may be configured.

  The normal variable winning ball device 58 is located between the first special variable winning ball device 66 disposed substantially at the center of the game area 41 and the second special variable winning ball device 48 disposed above the out port 69. This is an electric tulip type variable winning ball apparatus which is arranged and a pair of left and right movable members 53 are opened and closed by a solenoid 59. The starter switch 60 is built in the normally variable winning ball device 58. The starting opening switch 60 detects a winning ball received while the normally variable winning ball device 58 is open or closed. When the game ball is detected by the start port switch 60, the special symbol starts to fluctuate in the special symbol display device 44a, and the decorative symbol starts to fluctuate in the effect display device 44b. As described above, the start port switch 60 also serves as a start function for displaying a variation in the special symbol display device 44a. A game ball detected by the start port switch 60 that has entered the normal variable winning ball device 58 is called a starting winning ball. In addition, when a game ball enters the normal variable winning ball device 58 and is detected by the starting port switch 60 and a winning occurs, this is called starting winning.

  The special symbol display device 44a includes a plurality of (two) 7-segment LEDs that perform variable display of special symbols “0” to “9”, each of which is a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified, and derive and display the display result. It is a display equipped.

  In the present embodiment, the special symbol display of “0” to “9” is displayed as a special symbol display by alternately repeating the special symbol display device 44a between the lighting state and the extinguishing state. An example showing that is variably displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variation display mode of special symbols includes a variation display by scrolling special symbols “0” to “9” and a special symbol “0” to “9”. You may employ | adopt the aspect of the fluctuation | variation display performed using a special symbol itself like the fluctuation | variation display etc. by making the display switched at predetermined time intervals in the field. That is, as a special symbol variation display performed by the special symbol display device 44a, if the display result is derived and displayed after the display state indicating that the variation display of the identification information is performed, Any variation display mode may be adopted.

  The special symbol display device 44a derives and displays one of the special symbol blanks as the display result of the variable display. And the special symbol at the time of the fluctuation stop of the special symbol display device 44a becomes a predetermined jackpot symbol (for example, “00”, “11”, “33”, “55”, “77”, “99”). Sometimes, it is controlled to a specific gaming state (hereinafter referred to as a big hit or big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player. The jackpot gaming state includes two types of jackpot gaming states, a specific jackpot gaming state and a 15R (15 round) gaming state.

  In the special jackpot game state, the first special variable winning ball device 66 is driven from the closed state (second state in which the game ball is difficult to win), which is disadvantageous for the player, by driving the solenoid 105 to thereby obtain the first special variable winning ball device 66. The opening / closing piece 81 of the ball device 66 is rotated to open the first big winning opening 82 which is an opening, and intermittently in an open state (a first state in which a game ball is easy to win) which is advantageous to the player. This is a big hit gaming state in which control is performed to repeatedly execute rounds to be switched and operated (hereinafter referred to as intermittent operation) over a randomly determined number of rounds. When the special symbol when the fluctuation of the special symbol display device 44a is stopped becomes a predetermined big hit symbol (for example, “33”, “77”) among the big hit symbols, it is a specific big hit.

  In the 15R big hit game state, the second special variable winning ball device is driven by driving the solenoid 65 from the closed state (second state where the game ball does not win) which is disadvantageous for the player. The number of rounds that are operated in an open state (first state in which game balls are easy to win) that is advantageous to the player in a manner that opens the opening / closing plate 49 of 48 and opens the big winning opening is a predetermined number of rounds (15 rounds) (Hereinafter, it may be abbreviated as 15R)) is a big hit gaming state in which control is repeatedly executed.

  Further, the 15R big hit that becomes the 15R big hit gaming state includes a 15R probability variable big hit and a 15R normal big hit. The 15R probability variable jackpot is a jackpot probability that is a probability of determining that any of the jackpot gaming states after the change display after the end of the 15R jackpot game state (the change display result is set to any jackpot display result) The 15R jackpot is controlled to a high probability state (hereinafter, also referred to as a probability variation state, or abbreviated as its abbreviated state) that is higher than a predetermined low probability state as a normal jackpot probability. When the special symbol at the time of fluctuation stoppage of the special symbol display device 44a becomes a predetermined 15R probability variable big hit symbol (for example, “11”, “55”) among the big hit symbols, it is a 15R probability variable big hit and 15R After being controlled to the big hit gaming state, it is controlled to the probability variation state. In addition, after being controlled to the above-mentioned specific big hit gaming state state, in all cases, it is controlled to a probability variation state. The probability changing state that occurs after the specific big hit gaming state or after the 15R probability changing big hit gaming state is continued until the next 15R normal big hit occurs.

  Further, the 15R big hit is a 15R big hit in which the big hit probability is controlled to a predetermined normal big hit probability after the end of the 15R big hit gaming state. When the special symbol display device 44a is stopped when the fluctuation becomes a predetermined 15R normal big hit symbol (for example, "00", "99") among the big hit symbols, it is a 15R normal big hit and 15R After being controlled to the big hit gaming state, it is controlled to the normal state.

  Further, when the probability change state is reached, the normal symbol change time on the normal symbol display device 63 is set to the normal game state over the period in which the special symbol change display is executed a predetermined number of times after the end of the jackpot game state. Control is performed so that the shortened variation time is shorter than the variation time. A state in which control for reducing the variation time of the normal symbol after the end of the big hit gaming state is referred to as a time-short state.

Further, when the special symbol at the time when the variation of the special symbol display device 44a is stopped is a predetermined off symbol (for example, “00”, “22”, “44”, “66”, “88”), As described above, the game is not controlled to the big hit gaming state, and is in the off state.

  The effect display device 44 b is provided on the upper right side of the first special variable winning ball device 66. The effect display device 44b is a liquid crystal display (Liquid Crystal Display) in which a display area 80 for displaying various effect images is formed.

  When special symbol variation display is performed in the special symbol display device 44a, a variation display effect image for displaying the decorative symbols for effect variation in accordance with the variation display of the special symbol is displayed in the display area 80 of the effect display device 44b. Is displayed. The decorative symbols that are variably displayed on the effect display device 44b are a plurality of types of identification information that can be distinguished from each other. In order to enhance the decorative effect of the special symbol variability display on the special symbol display device 44a, It is a symbol with a decorative meaning that is variably displayed with a predetermined relationship with the display. For example, the decorative symbols are variably displayed in the display areas of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol arranged in the left-right direction. In each of the three display areas, decorative display of “0” to “9” is performed.

  The predetermined relationship between the special symbol and the decorative symbol includes, for example, the relationship that the variable symbol display starts when the special symbol variable display starts, and the special symbol display when the special symbol variable display ends. This includes a relationship in which the display result of the decorative symbol is derived and displayed when the result is derived and displayed, and the variation display of the decorative symbol is terminated. When a special jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as a display result by the special symbol display device 44a, the effect display device 44b causes the left, middle, and right symbols to be groovy or a combination of symbols other than groin. A combination of jackpot symbols that become the configured chances is derived and displayed as a display result. Here, the chance item is a combination of symbols constituted by a combination of symbols other than the above-mentioned symbols, and is determined in advance as a display result that brings a chance to the player. Such a display result of the jackpot symbol by the special symbol and the display result of the combination of the jackpot symbol by the decoration symbol are referred to as a jackpot display result. In addition, the display result of the special symbol and the display result of the combination of the special symbol and the decorative symbol are referred to as the “missing display result”. The special symbol display device 44a and the effect display device 44b have a correspondence relationship as described above, and therefore, in the following description, they may be collectively referred to as a variation display unit.

  Next, the reach display mode (reach) will be described. The reach display mode (reach) in the present embodiment means that the symbols that have not been stopped when the stopped symbols constitute a part of the jackpot symbol, and that all or This is a state where some symbols are synchronously displayed while constituting all or part of the jackpot symbol.

  For example, in the effect display device 44b, an effective line (one effective line in the case of this embodiment) that becomes a big hit when the symbol stops is determined in advance, and a part of the display area on the effective line is displayed. A state in which the variable display is performed in the display area on the active line that has not been stopped when the predetermined symbol is stopped (for example, the left, middle, and right variable display areas in the effect display device 44b). Of these, all or some of the display areas on the valid line) Are displayed in a synchronized manner while constituting all or part of the jackpot symbol (for example, the variation display is performed in all of the left, middle, and right display areas in the effect display device 44b). Is and always the same symbols a to state variable display state is made that) aligned that reach the display mode or reach.

In addition, during the reach, an unusual performance may be performed with a lamp or sound. This production is called reach production. Further, in the case of reach, a character (an effect display imitating a person or the like, which is different from a design (decoration design etc.)) or a display mode (for example, color etc.) of the background image of the effect display device 44b is displayed. ) May change. This change in character display and background display mode is called reach effect display. In addition, some reach is set so that when it appears, a big hit is likely to occur compared to a normal reach. Such special (specific) reach is called super reach.

  When the variation display result of the special symbol in the special symbol display device 44a becomes the jackpot display result, after the variation display result of the special symbol in the display area 80 of the effect display device 44b becomes the jackpot display result, A production image is displayed. During the big hit gaming state, a big hit medium effect image corresponding to each round in the big hit gaming state is displayed according to the type of the big hit gaming state. For example, the displayed image differs between the big hit effect image displayed in the above-mentioned specific big hit game state and the big hit effect image displayed in the aforementioned 15R big hit game state. At the end of the big hit gaming state, an effect image for the end of the big hit gaming state is displayed.

  Next, the first special variable winning ball device 66 will be described in detail. In the first special variable winning ball apparatus 66, on the left side, a first big winning opening 82 is provided as an opening for communicating the inside and the outside of the first special variable winning ball apparatus 66 according to the state. An opening / closing piece 81 for turning the first grand prize winning opening 82 in an open state or a closed state is rotatably provided. The open / close piece 81 is operated by an open / close piece solenoid 105 connected in an interlocking manner.

  When the opening / closing piece solenoid 105 is driven, the opening / closing piece 81 rotates in a direction to open the first big winning opening 82, and when the opening / closing piece solenoid 105 is driven, the first large winning opening 82 is opened. Rotate in the closing direction. Thus, the state in which the opening / closing piece 81 opens the first big winning opening 82 is the open state as the first state of the first special variable winning ball apparatus 66 described above, and the opening / closing piece 81 has the first big winning opening. The state where 82 is closed is the closed state as the second state of the first special variable winning ball apparatus 66 described above.

  In the first special variable winning ball device 66, when the first special variable winning ball device 66 is in an open state, a game ball that has entered the first special variable winning ball device 66 from the first large winning port 82 ( A first count switch 106 for detecting (winning ball) is provided. A game ball that has entered the first special variable winning ball device 66 is detected as a winning ball by the first count switch 106 and is then guided by the entering ball guiding passage 110 and enters one of the two entrances 104. Then, it is guided inside the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  In the case of a specific big hit, a predetermined number of winning balls (for example, 10) are received until the opening / closing piece 81 is opened and closed a predetermined number of times (18 times) or before the opening and closing of the predetermined number of times is completed. Control is performed to open the opening / closing piece 81 (hereinafter, this opening is referred to as an opening cycle) until it is detected by the count switch 106. One such opening cycle (for example, one opening cycle when the opening and closing piece 81 opens and closes 18 times) is called one round. In the specific jackpot gaming state, such a release cycle is repeated for the number of rounds determined at random when the specific jackpot is reached. Here, the prescribed number of winnings refers to the number of winning balls to the first special variable winning ball device 66 defined as a condition for completing one round as described above. In the case of this embodiment, the number is ten. It is prescribed.

The second special variable winning ball device 48 has an opening / closing plate 49 that is opened and closed by a solenoid 65, and detects a game ball received from a second large winning opening (not shown) opened by the opening / closing plate 49. A second count switch 52 is provided. In the second special variable winning ball device 48 (inside the opening / closing plate 49), there is a specific ball detector 51 which is a detector for establishing a big hit continuation right with the detection of the game ball (V winning detection). Is provided. Above the specific ball detector 51, there is provided a V shutter (not shown) that prevents the game ball from passing through the specific ball detector 51 once the V winning detection is detected until the opening / closing plate 49 is opened next time. ing. This V shutter is driven to open and close by a solenoid 50. In the case of 15R big hit, in a 15R big hit game state, until a predetermined time (for example, 29 seconds) elapses or until a predetermined number (for example, 9) of winning balls are won within the predetermined time. Control is performed to open the opening / closing plate 49 (hereinafter, this opening is referred to as an opening cycle). When the game ball received during the release cycle is detected by the specific ball detector 51, the right to continue is established at that time, and the release cycle described above is executed again. One such open cycle is called one round. Then, control for repeating the release cycle for 15 rounds is performed on the condition that the continuation right is established in each release cycle.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, a plurality of variable winning ball devices including the first special variable winning ball device 66 and the second special variable winning ball device 48 are provided as variable winning ball devices. These variable winning ball devices are selectively used by being controlled in different manners according to the fluctuation display result in the special symbol display device 44a. The first special variable winning ball device 66 and the second special variable winning ball device 48 may be integrally formed in a manner in which two openings are provided in one variable winning ball device. Further, the second special variable winning ball device 48 is not provided, and the first special variable winning ball device 66 is opened in the same manner as the second special variable winning ball device 48 not only in the specific big hit gaming state but also in the big hit gaming state. The first special variable winning ball apparatus 66 may also function as the second special variable winning ball apparatus 48 as controlled by the above.

  The jackpot gaming state of the present invention is not limited to the above, and may be any state in which any one of the following controls (1) to (5) or a combination of controls is executed.

(1) The first special variable winning ball device 66 or the second special variable winning that can be changed between a first state in which a game ball can be easily won and a second state in which the game ball cannot be won or difficult to win. Control that sets ball device 48 to the first state continuously or intermittently for a predetermined time (2) First to facilitate the winning of a game ball by intervening detection of a game ball in a specific winning or passing area The second special variable winning ball device 66 or the second special variable winning ball device 48 that can be changed to the second state in which the game ball cannot be won or is difficult to win. (3) Control to directly discharge a predetermined number of prize balls regardless of the winning of game balls (4) Add valuable number to valuable storage media (cards, receipts, etc.) Control (5) Based on having a score Control for assigning points to gameable ball game machines As described above, each of the winning holes and winning devices for winning game balls has a switch (for example, a winning ball detector for detecting winning balls). , Switches 51, 52, and 106), which are used to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls based on these detection signals. The specific sphere detector 51 also has a function of detecting establishment of a continuation right. The first count switch 106 also serves as a counting function for regulating the opening of the opening / closing piece 81. The second count switch 52 also has a counting function for restricting the opening of the opening / closing plate 49. As a means for detecting a game ball, there is also provided a gate switch 62 that detects a game ball but is not used for paying out a prize ball. Further, the game board 40 is provided with a plurality of decoration LEDs / lamps 32 for enhancing the decoration effect on the left and right sides of the game area 41.

As described above, the game board 40 is provided with a number of switches, solenoids, decorative lamps, decorative LEDs, and the like. These are connected to the main board 120 via an audio frame lamp board 92 and an effect control board 90 or a switch relay board 95 described later. That is, each switch and each solenoid provided on the game board 40 are connected to the main board 120 via the switch relay board 95, and the decoration LED / lamp 3 provided on the left and right sides of the game board 40.
2 is connected to the main board 120 via a voice frame lamp board 92 and an effect control board 90.

  The configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the configuration of the gaming board 40 have been described above. Next, the configuration of the control circuit of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the relationship between the main board 120, various control boards, and electrical components.

  A game control microcomputer 99 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main board 120. The game control microcomputer 99 includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 100 as a storage means for storing a game control program and the like, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 111 as a storage means used as a work memory, and a game according to the program. A central processing unit (CPU) 112 that controls the progress of the image, and an I / O port unit 114 that transmits a control signal (command) to the effect control board 90 and the like. In this embodiment, the ROM 100 and RAM 111 are built in the game control microcomputer 99. That is, the game control microcomputer 99 is a one-chip microcomputer. Since the CPU 112 executes control according to a program stored in the ROM 100, what the CPU 112 executes (or performs processing) below specifically means that the CPU 112 executes control according to the program. The same applies to CPUs mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 120.

  Signals from the switches 51, 52, 60, 62, and 106 provided on the game board 40 are input to the main board 120 via the switch relay board 95, and signals from the full switch 158 and the ball break switch 157 are input. Is input via the payout control board 98. It should be noted that the signal from the ball break switch 157 may be configured not to be input to the main board 120. Similarly, the signal from the full tank switch 158 may be configured not to be input to the main board 120. Further, a signal from a payout number count switch (not shown) mounted on the ball payout device 154 is input to the main board 120 via the payout control board 98.

  A signal from the start port switch 60 is also input to the main board 120. Further, the main board 120 is connected to a random number generation circuit 60a constituting R1 described later with reference to FIG. When the signal from the start port switch 60 is input, the random number generation circuit 60a inputs the count value at that time to the main board 120. The main board 120 latches the count value input from the random number generation circuit 60a in a storage buffer provided in the RAM 111, and reads the latched count value when it is determined that there is a start prize. To do.

  Based on the input signals from the switches 51, 52, 60, 62, and 106 provided on the game board 40 among the input signals described above, the main board 120 performs the following processing. The main board 120 drives and controls solenoids 50, 59, 65, and 105 provided on the game board 40, and transmits information signals such as an electric decoration signal and a sound effect signal according to the game state to the peripheral command relay board 57 and the effect control. The sound is output to the voice frame lamp substrate 92 via the substrate 90. Further, the main board 120 outputs an effect control command for controlling the display state of the effect display device 44b to the effect control board 90 via the peripheral command relay board 57, and various game information is output to the board external terminal board 96. Is output. The effect control board 90 controls the display operation of the effect display device 44b according to the effect control command from the main board 120 and exchanges information signals with the voice frame lamp board 92.

The voice frame lamp board 92 is based on the game effect LEDs 13, 14 a, 14 c and the game effect lamps 14 b, 14 d, 16 a, which are attached to the front door frame 4, according to the type of the illumination signal input from the main board 120. , 16b, 17a, 17b. The voice frame lamp board 92 controls the speakers 12 a and 12 b according to the type of the sound effect signal input from the main board 120. Further, the voice frame lamp board 92 controls the lighting of various decorative LEDs / lamps 32 attached to the game board 40 via the lamp driver board 93 in accordance with the type of electrical signal input from the main board 120. To do. The voice frame lamp board 92 has various game effect LEDs, games depending on the gaming state (whether it is a big hit gaming state, a variation pattern, a normal gaming state, a probability variation state, a short-time state, an open state, or a variation display). The lighting control of the effect lamp and various decoration LEDs / lamps is performed, and the speaker driving control for outputting the game sound from the speakers 12a and 12b is performed. The lamp driver board 93 relays the connection with the voice frame lamp board 92 for controlling the lighting state of the decoration LED provided on the game board 40.

  In this embodiment, an example in which the effect control board 90 is formed separately from each of the voice frame lamp board 92 and the lamp driver board 93 has been shown. The lamp substrate 92 and the lamp driver substrate 93 may be integrally formed. In that case, the effect control microcomputer 800 may be configured to control the display control of the effect display device 44b, the speaker drive control, and the lighting control of various LEDs and lamps.

  The main board 120 inputs a display control signal (driving signal) through the symbol relay board 84 to the special symbol board 850 on which the special symbol display device 44a and the special symbol start memory LED 46 are mounted, and in the special symbol display device 44a. The special symbol display control is performed and the lighting control of the special symbol start memory LED 46 is performed.

  Further, the main board 120 inputs a display control signal (drive signal) to the normal symbol board 86 on which the normal symbol display device 63 is mounted via the symbol relay board 84, and displays the normal symbol on the normal symbol display device 63. Take control. Further, the main board 120 inputs a display control signal (drive signal) via the symbol relay board 84 to the normal symbol memory board 87 on which the normal symbol start memory LED 64 is mounted, and controls the lighting of the normal symbol start memory LED 64. Do.

  The effect control board 90 is equipped with an effect control microcomputer 900 including a CPU 903, a RAM 902, a ROM 901, an I / O port unit (not shown), and the like. Accordingly, display control of the effect image in the effect display device 44b is performed. In addition to the effect control microcomputer 900, the effect control board 90 is equipped with a VDP (Video Display Processor) 904, a character ROM (not shown), and a VRAM (Video Random Access Memory) (not shown). . The VDP 904 is a processing device having a display control function for performing image display and a high-speed drawing function, and performs display control of the effect display device 44b.

  The effect control microcomputer 900 operates in accordance with a program stored in the ROM 901. When the effect control command is received from the main board 120, the display control of the effect display device 44b according to the received command is performed according to the received effect control command. Do. Specifically, CPU 903 transmits control data for displaying an image corresponding to the effect control command to VDP 904 in accordance with the received effect control command. The VDP 904 reads out necessary data from the character ROM in order to display an image according to the control data transmitted as described above. The character ROM is for storing image data to be displayed on the effect display device 44b in advance.

The VDP 904 has a two-dimensional address space independent of the CPU 903, and VR
AM is mapped. The VDP 904 generates image data to be displayed on the effect display device 44b according to the image data of the character ROM, and the VDP 904 expands the image data in the VRAM. A VRAM is a frame buffer memory for expanding image data generated by the VDP 904. The image data developed in the VRAM is output to the effect display device 44b.

  Next, the dispensing control board 98 outputs a dispensing stop signal to the ball dispensing device 154 based on the full tank signal from the full tank switch 158, and stops the driving of the dispensing motor. The full tank signal from the full tank switch 158 is input to the main board 120 via the payout control board 98. When a full tank signal from the full tank switch 158 is input to the main board 120, a full tank signal is output from the main board 120 to the voice frame lamp board 92 to display and drive a predetermined lamp or LED. May be notified. Further, since the full tank signal from the full switch 158 is output to the payout control board 98, for example, an error indicator on the payout control board 98 or the like may be notified.

  The main board 120 outputs a prize ball number signal to the payout control board 98 based on the input signals from the switches 51, 52, 60, 106 provided on the game board 40. The payout control board 98 drives a payout motor (not shown) to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the input of the prize ball number signal. Further, the payout control board 98 displays the prize ball LED 10 based on an input of the prize ball number signal and notifies the fact.

  Further, the payout control board 98 outputs a payout stop signal to the ball payout device 154 based on the ball cut switch signal from the ball cut switch 157, and stops driving of the payout motor. The payout control board 98 drives the broken LED 9 to display in a predetermined manner.

  Only the switch input for controlling the game operation and the switch input for controlling the payout operation of the prize ball are input to the main board 120, and the relationship between the main board 120 and other control boards excluding the payout control board 98 In FIG. 2, the communication relationship is one-way from the main board 120 to another control board. For this reason, there is an advantage that an illegal processing program is incorporated into another control board and cannot be executed even if an illegal process is performed on the main board 120, and a part of the control of the main board 120 is transferred to another control board. Since the control board is in charge, the burden on the main board 120 can be reduced and the inspection of the main board 120 can be facilitated.

  The payout control board 98 also includes signals from the motor position sensor and the payout number count switch mounted on the ball payout device 154, the full signal from the full switch 158 as described above, and the ball break switch 157. The ball break signal is input. Further, a game ball lending device connection terminal board 103 for relaying signals from the card unit device 128 and the balance display board 104 is connected to the payout control board 98, and the ball lending mounted on the balance display board 104 is connected. Signals from the switch and the return switch and various information from the card unit device 128 are input. Furthermore, as described above, a prize ball number signal is input to the payout control board 98 from the main board 120. Of the input signals described above, the payout control board 98 is based on the input signal from the motor position sensor, and the payout motor stop position in the payout operation of the lending and winning balls, that is, the stop position of the ball payout member of the ball payout device 154 It is possible to detect whether or not the ball dispensing member is operating as well as accurately controlling. Further, the payout control board 98 controls the driving of the payout motor so as to pay out the correct payout number of the rented and prize balls based on the input signal from the payout number counting switch, and the rented ball on the external terminal board for the frame. Number information (25 pulses for 100 yen, 1 pulse) is output. Note that the prize ball number information may be output from the main board 120.

The payout control board 98 performs control to drive the payout motor when a ball rental request signal is input from the card unit device 128 via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 103. Further, a signal from the return switch is transmitted to the card unit device 128 via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 103. Various information signals from the card unit device 128 are also transmitted to the frequency display LED (not shown) of the balance display board 104 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 103. Further, the payout control board 98 executes a prize ball payout operation based on a prize ball number signal from the main board 120, a ball dead signal and a full tank signal directly inputted from the switch, and the firing control board 107. Or output a stop signal for the launch motor. Note that the input signals from the ball break switch 157 and the full tank switch 158 connected to the frame external terminal board are output to the external hall management computer or the like as ball dead information or full tank information.

  The power supply board 97 receives AC 24V AC power as a primary power supply through a power cord. The power supply board 97 supplies power as a secondary power supply to the main board 120 and the payout control board 98. The main board 120 performs various control processes based on the power supplied from the power supply board 97 and supplies power for driving various game effect LEDs, game effect lamps, decoration lamps, speakers, and the like to the peripheral power supply relay board. The sound frame lamp substrate 92 is supplied via 47. The peripheral power supply relay board 47 relays power supplied from the main board 120 to the audio frame lamp board 92. The voice frame lamp board 92 lights various game effect LEDs, game effect lamps, and decoration lamps based on the electric power supplied from the main board 120, and displays an image on the effect display device 44b on the effect control board 90. To supply power for. The payout control board 98 performs various control processes including a process of driving the payout motor and the firing motor based on the electric power supplied from the power supply board 97. On the power supply board 97, a clear switch 97a for clearing all operations of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is mounted.

  Next, a random counter for generating a random value (also referred to as a count value) used for control in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment will be described. FIG. 3A is a diagram for explaining various random counters used by the game control microcomputer 99 for game control. FIG. 3A shows six types of random counters R1 to R6 as examples of the random counter.

  R1 is a game state determination for generating a random value used for determining in advance whether or not to generate a specific big hit, a 15R probability variable big hit, and a 15R normal big hit for the fluctuation display of the special symbol display device 44a. The counter is configured to count up from “0”, count up to “599” which is the upper limit thereof, and count up again from “0”. This R1 is a random number generation circuit 60a (see FIG. 2) that performs addition and update at an extremely high speed (10 MHz) irrespective of clock control (for example, interrupt processing described later) of the game control microcomputer 99. The game control microcomputer 99 latches (temporarily holds) the count value of R1 at the time when the input signal from the start port switch 60 is turned on in the storage buffer, and determines that there is a start prize by the software. When the count value latched in the storage buffer is stored in the storage area of the RAM 111 as data of the start winning memory (for example, when the input signal is in the ON state while the interrupt processing is performed twice). Then, for the special symbol display device 44a, the count value stored in the storage area of the RAM 111 is a predetermined specific big hit determination value, 15R probability variable big hit determination value before the start of the special symbol variation display. , And whether or not each of the 15R normal jackpot determination values matches (matches).

Here, the specific jackpot determination value, the 15R probability variation jackpot determination value, the 15R normal jackpot determination value, and the outbreak jackpot determination value will be described. FIG. 3B is a diagram for explaining a specific jackpot determination value, a 15R probability variation jackpot determination value, a 15R normal jackpot determination value, and a loss determination value among the count values of the random counter R1. The numbers of the specific jackpot determination value, 15R probability variation jackpot determination value, 15R normal jackpot determination value, and outlier determination value are different between the low probability state and the high probability state.

  With reference to FIG.3 (b), a specific jackpot determination value is a jackpot determination value for determining that the above-mentioned specific jackpot is generated. As the specific jackpot determination value, two numerical values of the count value of the random counter R1 are preset as determination values used in the low probability state, and 20 of the count value of the random counter R1 are used as the determination values used in the high probability state. Numbers are preset. The 15R probability variation jackpot determination value is a jackpot determination value for determining that the aforementioned 15R probability variation jackpot is generated. The 15R probability variable jackpot determination value is set in advance as a determination value used in the low probability state, one of the count values of the random counter R1, which is different from the determination value for other game state determination, and is used in the high probability state. Of the count values of the random counter R1, ten numerical values different from the determination values for other gaming state determination are set in advance as the determination values. The 15R normal big hit determination value is a big hit determination value for determining that the aforementioned 15R normal big hit is generated. The 15R normal jackpot determination value is set in advance as a determination value used in the low probability state, one of the count values of the random counter R1, which is different from the determination value for other gaming state determination, and is used in the high probability state. Of the count values of the random counter R1, ten numerical values different from the determination values for other gaming state determination are set in advance as the determination values. The loss determination value is a loss determination value for determining that no big hit is generated. The outlier determination value includes a determination value used in the low probability state and a determination value used in the high probability state. It is a judgment value other than the judgment value. As described above, in the high probability state, there are many determination values that are jackpots compared to the low probability state, and therefore, the probability that the jackpot is determined is higher than that in the low probability state.

  Referring to FIG. 3A, R2 is a random counter for generating a random value used for randomly determining a special symbol to be displayed on the special symbol display device 44a. The count value of R2 is configured to count up from “0”, count up to the upper limit “9”, and count up again from “0”. The game control microcomputer 99 sets the count value to 2 msec. It is updated every time and after the interrupt processing time.

  Here, the count-up operation in the remaining interrupt processing time performed in a predetermined random counter such as R2 will be described. The CPU 112 of the game control microcomputer 99 performs various controls by periodically executing interrupt processing. For a certain interrupt processing, after the interrupt processing is executed, the period until the next execution start of the interrupt processing is performed. Waiting for interrupt processing. Repeating the random counter addition update process using an infinite loop during the interrupt process surplus time waiting for such interrupt process is called counting up the interrupt process surplus time.

  R3 is a random counter for generating a random value used to randomly determine the number of rounds for a specific jackpot when it is determined to be a specific jackpot based on the value of R1. The count value of R3 is configured to count up from “0”, count up to its upper limit “99”, and count up again from “0”. The game control microcomputer 99 sets the count value to 2 msec. Updated every time.

  Next, the relationship between the count value of R3 and the determined number of rounds will be described. FIG. 3C is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the count value of the random counter R3 and the determined number of rounds.

With reference to FIG.3 (c), when the value of R3 is either 0-19, a round number is determined to be 2 rounds. When the value of R3 is any of 20 to 39, the number of rounds is determined to be 8 rounds. When the value of R3 is any of 40 to 59, the number of rounds is determined to be 10 rounds. When the value of R3 is between 60 and 79, the number of rounds is determined to be 12 rounds. When the value of R3 is any of 80 to 99, the number of rounds is determined to be 16 rounds. As described above, the number of rounds in the specific jackpot gaming state is randomly determined according to the value of R3.

  Referring to FIG. 3 (b), R4 is a random value used for randomly selecting and determining a variation pattern that is a variation display pattern of special symbol display device 44a and effect display device 44b (referred to as variation pattern determination). Is a random counter for generating The count value of R4 is configured to be counted up from “0” by the gaming control microcomputer 99, up to “199” which is the upper limit thereof, and then counted up from “0” again. The game control microcomputer 99 adds and updates every 2 msec and the interrupt processing surplus time. Based on the value of the counter extracted from R4 at a predetermined timing such as at the start of special symbol variation, based on the relationship between the predetermined count value and the variation pattern, from among a plurality of predetermined variation patterns The variation pattern used for variation display is selected and determined. Each fluctuation pattern has a predetermined fluctuation display time (the time from the start of fluctuation display until the display result is derived and displayed, also called the fluctuation time). The variable display time is selected and determined. Data that defines the relationship between the count value of R4 and a plurality of types of variation patterns is set in a variation pattern table stored in the ROM 100.

  If R4 is determined to be out of play by the determination of the gaming state using R1, whether or not the effect display device 44b described above forms the decorative symbol reach display mode during the variable display (hereinafter referred to as reach out) This is a reach determination random counter for generating a random number used for determining at random whether a reach display mode is not formed (hereinafter referred to as non-reach deviation). R5 is configured to count up from “0”, count up to its upper limit “39”, and then count up again from “0”. The game control microcomputer 99 interrupts every 2 msec and interrupts. It is updated by adding to the processing surplus time. At the stage before determining the variation pattern, the value of R5 is extracted, and it is determined whether or not the extracted value of R5 matches a predetermined reach determination value. If these values match, it is determined that the reach is out of control, and the reach state is controlled during the variable display where the display result is out of control. On the other hand, if these values do not match, it is determined that the non-reach is out of control, and control is performed so as not to reach the reach state during the variable display where the display result is out of place.

  R6 is a random counter for generating a random value used to randomly determine in advance whether or not to generate a hit for the variable display of the normal symbol display device 63. The count value of R4 is configured to be counted up from “0” by the game control microcomputer 99 to “250” which is the upper limit thereof, and to be counted up again from “0”. An addition is updated every 2 msec. When a valid start passage is detected by the gate switch 62, the count value of R6 is extracted and stored in the RAM 111 as passage storage data. Then, at the stage before starting the fluctuation display of the normal symbol, it is determined whether or not the extracted value matches a predetermined hit determination value. The above-described control is performed, and in the case of a mismatch, it is determined to be off and the above-described control is not performed.

Functions such as the gaming state determination function, special symbol determination function, specific big hit gaming state round number determination function, variation pattern determination function, reach determination function, and normal symbol hit determination function as shown above This is realized by the control function of the game control microcomputer 99.

  Next, the respective opening operations of the first special variable winning ball device 66 and the second special variable winning ball device 48 that are released in the big hit gaming state will be described. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating the opening operations of the first special variable winning ball device 66 and the second special variable winning ball device 48 in a table format.

  In FIG. 4, (a) shows the opening operation of the first special variable winning ball device 66 for one round, and (b) shows the opening operation of the second special variable winning ball device 48 for one round. As shown in (a), the first special variable winning ball apparatus 66 is set in an open state by 850 msec at 800 msec intervals in one round by setting an open time of 850 msec and a close time of 800 msec for one round. As a result, it is intermittently repeated up to 18 times to be in the open state. The drive pattern of the open / close piece 81 (drive pattern of the open / close piece solenoid 105) in which the first special winning opening 82 of the first special variable winning ball apparatus 66 is opened for 850 msec and closed for 800 msec is shown. Data is stored in the ROM 100. In the case of this embodiment, the control period of one round for performing the control of each round starts from the timing when the closed state is started by the closing time lasting 800 ms. The one-round control period ends when the first special variable winning ball device 66 repeats a maximum of 18 times to enter the closed state and the open state, and then ends when the final open state ends and becomes the closed state. To do. The control period of one round starts from the timing when the closed state is started with a closing time of 800 ms, but the actual round control in which the first special variable winning ball device 66 is actually opened intermittently in each round. The timing for starting the operation (opening operation) is after 800 ms have elapsed since the start of the control period of each round. Therefore, in the case of the present embodiment, the control operation period in which the control operation of the round in which the first special variable winning ball device 66 is intermittently opened is executed is the period of the first closed state in the control period of each round It will be repeated across. As a result, the control operation period in each round continues repeatedly with the first closed state period in the control period of each round as a break. For this reason, since it can be said that the period of the first closed state in the control period of each round is a period between rounds about the actual control operation period in each round, in the control of this embodiment, the period is Treated as the period between rounds for round control action. Therefore, in the following description, a period between rounds means a period defined in this way.

  Further, as shown in (b), the second special variable winning ball apparatus is set to an open state for 2950 msec in one round by setting an open time of 2950 msec for one round.

  Next, the number of rounds in the big hit gaming state designated by the effect control command will be described. FIG. 5 is a table showing the relationship between the symbol designation command to be transmitted and the number of rounds to be designated in a table format for the big hit of the specific big hit, 15R probability variable big hit, and 15R normal big hit.

  The effect control command has a 2-byte structure. Basically, the upper byte (first byte) indicates MODE (command classification), and the lower byte (second byte) indicates EXT (command type). The symbol designating command indicates the classification of symbols such as outlier symbol, specific jackpot symbol, probability variation jackpot symbol, and normal jackpot symbol according to the upper byte data, and indicates the number of rounds of the jackpot gaming state by the lower byte data . In FIG. 5, the lower byte data is shown in hexadecimal for various symbol designating commands.

Referring to FIG. 5, in the off symbol designating command, the big hit gaming state is not achieved, the number of rounds is 0, and the data in the lower byte is “00”. A command for designating a specific jackpot symbol is called a specific jackpot symbol designation command.

  In the specific jackpot symbol designating command, the lower byte data is “01” when the number of rounds is determined to be two. The command is called a 2R specific jackpot symbol designation command. In the specific jackpot designating command, when the number of rounds is determined to be 8 rounds, the lower byte data is “02”. The command is called an 8R specific jackpot symbol designation command. In the specific jackpot symbol designating command, when the number of rounds is determined to be 10 rounds, the lower byte data is “03”. The command is called a 10R specific jackpot symbol designation command. In the specific jackpot designating command, when the number of rounds is determined to be 12 rounds, the lower byte data is “04”. The command is called a 12R specific jackpot symbol designation command. In the specific jackpot designating command, when the number of rounds is determined to be 16 rounds, the lower byte data is “05”. The command is called a 16R specific jackpot symbol designation command.

  A command for designating a 15R jackpot symbol is called a 15R jackpot symbol designation command. Of the 15R jackpot symbol designating commands, the 15R probability varying jackpot symbol designating command for designating the 15R probability varying jackpot symbol has 15 rounds and the lower byte data is “06”. Among the 15R jackpot symbol designating commands, the 15R probability varying jackpot symbol designating command designating the 15R probability varying jackpot symbol has 15 rounds and the lower byte data is “07”. Thus, the number of rounds in the big hit gaming state is designated by the lower byte data of the symbol designation command.

  FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining an example of various random counters used by the effect control microcomputer 900 for effect control. FIG. 6 shows, as an example of a random counter, random counters RS1 to RS3 for determining decorative symbols to be stopped and a random counter RS4 for determining effect contents.

  RS1 to RS3 are numerical data updating means (random counter) for determining a decorative symbol stop symbol for generating a random number used to randomly determine a stop symbol of the decorative symbol in advance for the effect display device 44b. . RS1 is used to determine the stop symbol of the left symbol. RS2 is used to determine the stop symbol of the middle symbol. RS3 is used to determine the stop symbol of the right symbol. For each of RS1 to RS3, RS1 is updated every 33 msec, RS2 is added every RS1 carry, and RS3 is added every RS2 carry, updated from 0 and updated to 9 which is the upper limit again. Updated from 0.

  The decorative symbols are changed (updated) and displayed in accordance with a predetermined symbol arrangement order. In the predetermined missing symbol determination data table, numerical data for determining a decorative symbol stop symbol is associated with each of the plurality of types of decorative symbols, and the gaming control microcomputer 99 determines the gaming state (R1). In the case where it is determined that the deviation is determined and the reach state is not set by the reach determination, that is, when it is determined that the non-reach is shifted, each of RS1 to RS3 is determined at a predetermined timing. The symbols corresponding to the random numbers extracted from the left, middle and right decorative symbols are determined as combinations of outlier symbols that result in variable display results (outlier display results). When the stop symbol corresponding to the extracted random number coincides with the combination of the big hit symbol by accident, the correction is made so that it becomes a combination of the off symbol (for example, correction for shifting the right symbol by one symbol). Each stop symbol is determined. In addition, in the case of non-reach off, if the stop symbol corresponding to the extracted random number is accidentally reached, the correction is made so that the non-reach off symbol is combined (for example, the right symbol is one symbol). Each stop symbol is determined by correction).

  Further, when it is determined that the reach state is determined by the reach determination, the symbol corresponding to the random number extracted from RS1 among the random numbers extracted at the above-described timing is set to the reach state. The symbols to be formed are determined as stop symbols for the left and right decorative symbols to be formed, and the symbol corresponding to the numerical data matching the counter value extracted from RS2 is determined as the stop symbol for the middle symbol. In this case as well, when the symbol combination is accidentally a combination of symbols, the stop symbols are determined by correcting the symbols so that they become a combination of symbols that are out of place (for example, correction for shifting the middle symbol by one symbol).

  Further, when it is determined that the 15R probability variation big hit is made by the gaming state determination by the gaming control microcomputer 99, each of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols is based on the random number extracted from RS1 at a predetermined timing. The variation display result is randomly determined as a combination of jackpot symbols (hereinafter also referred to as a 15R probability variation jackpot display result) that becomes a rough pattern in any of the predetermined probability variation symbols (odd symbols). A probability variation symbol table showing the relationship between RS1 and the probability variation symbol to be selected is stored in the ROM 901, and a combination of probability variation big hit symbols is determined based on the extracted value of RS1 using the probability variation symbol table.

  Further, when it is determined that the game state determination by the game control microcomputer 99 is 15R normal big hit, each of the left, middle and right decorative symbols is based on a random number extracted from RS1 at a predetermined timing. The variation display result is randomly determined as a combination of jackpot symbols that are rough in any one of the non-probability symbols other than the above-mentioned probability variation symbols (hereinafter also referred to as a 15R normal jackpot display result). A non-probability variable symbol table indicating the relationship between RS1 and the selected non-probable variable symbol is stored in the ROM 901, and a combination of non-probable variable big hit symbols is determined based on the extracted value of RS1 using the non-probable variable symbol table.

  Further, when the game state determination by the game control microcomputer 99 is determined to be a specific jackpot, any one of a plurality of types of chances is selected based on a random number extracted from RS1 at a predetermined timing. The eyes are randomly determined as a combination of jackpot symbols (hereinafter also referred to as a specific jackpot display result). A chance eye table, which is a data table indicating the relationship between RS1 and a chance eye to be selected, is stored in the ROM 901, and the chance eye is determined based on the extracted value of RS1 using the chance eye table.

  RS4 is a numerical data update means (random counter) for effect content determination for generating random numbers used to randomly determine the content of various effects performed by the variable display device 9. RS4 is configured to count up from “0”, count up to its upper limit “199”, and count up again from “0”, and is incremented and updated by 1 every 33 msec. For RS4, the counter value is extracted at a predetermined timing, and the content of the effect is selected and determined based on the relationship between the counter value determined in advance and the content of the effect.

Next, a bonus effect that is an effect performed in the specific jackpot gaming state will be described. The bonus effect is an effect performed by the effect display device 44b during a period in which the specific big hit gaming state is executed. In the bonus performance, the total value of the expected number of winnings (hereinafter referred to as the total expected number of winnings) of all rounds (total rounds) in which the specific jackpot gaming state is executed is notified so that it can be specified once as it is, or There is an effect in which the number of expected winnings is smaller than the expected total number of winnings, and the number of expected winnings is divided into a plurality of times so that the expected number of winnings can be specified. Here, the expected number of winnings refers to the number of game balls expected to win based on the prescribed number of winnings in one or more rounds. For example, when the prescribed number of winnings for one round is 10, the expected number of winnings for one round is 10, and the expected number of winnings for two rounds is 20. In this way, the effect of informing the expected number of winnings divided into the expected number of winnings divided into a plurality of expected winnings in multiple times is the fact that the entire control period of the specific jackpot gaming state is virtually divided into a plurality of control periods based on the expected winning number This is an effect that individually reports the expected number of winnings in each control period. In the specific jackpot gaming state, each control period for which the expected number of winnings will be notified individually is referred to as an individual period in the following description in order to clearly distinguish it from all control periods in the specific jackpot gaming state.

  Here, in the bonus production, an example in which the expected number of winnings smaller than the expected total number of winnings is divided into a plurality of notifications will be described. When the number of winnings is 80, the total expected number of winnings is set to a partial winning expectation number by a multiple of the prescribed winning number such as 20, 20, or 40, corresponding to the prescribed number of winnings of the round 10 Dividing and informing that there are 20 expected winning numbers as the first notification at the start of the specific jackpot gaming state, informing that there are 20 expected winning numbers as the next notification, the next 3 By notifying that the expected number of winnings is 40 as the second notification, the expected number of winnings corresponding to the total expected number of winnings of 80 is reported. In this case, the partial expected number of winnings of 20 is the total prescribed winning number corresponding to two of the eight rounds (the prescribed winning number of 10 per round × 2). In this case, the partial expected number of winnings of 40 is the total prescribed number of winnings corresponding to four of the eight rounds (the number of prescribed winnings per round 10 × 4).

  Further, in the bonus effect, a winning number indicating the number of game balls that have entered (winned) into the first special variable winning ball device 66 during each individual period is displayed. This number of winnings is called the number of winnings for each individual period, and displays the same numerical value as the expected number of winnings displayed for each individual period, and subtracts and updates that number each time a winning ball is detected. Displayed in countdown display format. Further, in the bonus performance, the number of winnings when the specific big hit gaming state is continuously generated is displayed. This number of winnings is referred to as the cumulative number of winnings. From the initial value (“0”) at the first specific big hit after power-on of the pachinko machine 1 and each specific big hit at the next 15R big hit, Each time a winning ball is detected, it is displayed in a count-up display format in which the numerical value is added and updated. Then, such a cumulative winning number is reset when 15R probability variation big hit or 15R normal big hit is reached (SD11 in FIG. 21).

  In the bonus effect, at the start of the bonus effect, the word “bonus” is displayed to notify that the player is in a specific jackpot gaming state. Thereby, the player can easily grasp that the player is in the specific big hit gaming state. Such notification is referred to as bonus notification in the following description. The bonus notification is performed as a bonus start effect display in the display of the bonus effect. In the bonus start effect display, the number of consecutive bonuses is displayed that indicates how many times the specific jackpot gaming state has been generated by a count value. The number of consecutive bonuses is set for the first time at the first specific big hit after power-on of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and at the next specific big hit after 15R big hit. Then, the number of consecutive bonuses is incremented by 1 every time the big hit becomes a specific big hit (SR8 in FIG. 32), and is reset when the 15R probability variation big hit or 15R normal big hit is reached (SD11 in FIG. 21). ).

  In the bonus production, when the total expected number of winnings is divided into partial expected winning numbers corresponding to the prescribed number of winnings in the round and the expected number of winnings is notified a plurality of times, at each notification after the second time, By displaying the word “continue”, it is notified that the specific jackpot gaming state will continue. Such notification is referred to as continuous notification in the following description. This continuous notification is performed as a bonus continuous effect display in the display of the bonus effect.

Regarding bonus effects, in addition to determining the expected number of winnings corresponding to the prescribed number of winnings in the round as described above, the expected number of winnings may be determined without corresponding to the prescribed number of winnings in the round. As an example, the total expected number of winnings is divided into a plurality of partial winning expectation numbers that do not become multiples of the prescribed winning numbers such as 22, 22, 36, for example. Is notified that there are 22 expected winning numbers, the second notification is notified that there are 22 expected winning numbers, and the next third notification is 36 expected winning numbers. By notifying that there is, the expected number of winnings corresponding to the total number of expected winnings of 80 is notified.

  In bonus production, when the total expected number of winnings is not divided into the prescribed number of winnings in the round and divided into partial expected winning numbers, the expected number of winnings is notified a plurality of times. , The fact that the specific big hit gaming state continues is notified. Such notification is referred to as continuous notification in the following description as in the case described above.

  When performing such a bonus effect, if the expected number of winnings to be notified is determined corresponding to the prescribed number of winnings for the round, basically, it is between the round executed first and the next executed round. The continuous notification is executed (hereinafter referred to as between rounds). Further, when performing a bonus effect, if the expected number of winnings to be notified is determined without corresponding to the prescribed number of winnings in the round, basically, continuous notification is executed in the middle of the round.

  In the bonus effect, a display that the specific big hit gaming state continues every time continuous notification is performed is displayed. By performing continuous notification in such a bonus effect, it is determined whether or not the specific big hit gaming state is continued inside the pachinko gaming machine 1 every time the individual period is ended, and the specific big hit is determined according to the determination result. It is possible to give the player an impression that the game state is continuously generated.

  FIGS. 7 to 11 are diagrams showing, in a tabular form, continuous notification patterns (hereinafter referred to as bonus continuation patterns) of bonus effects that can be selected for each number of rounds determined when it is determined to be a specific big hit.

  FIG. 7 shows a bonus continuation pattern when the number of rounds is determined to be two. The bonus continuation pattern when the number of rounds is determined to be 2 is the pattern no. There is only one pattern. For example, the pattern No. 1 indicates that the selection rate is 100%, the number of individual periods is one, and the expected number of winnings is 20 in the first notification. The ROM 901 of the effect control microcomputer 900 stores bonus continuation pattern data which is data indicating a bonus continuation pattern of such a pattern when the number of rounds in the specific big hit gaming state is determined to be two rounds. Similarly, in the ROM 901 of the production control microcomputer 900, a bonus that is selected when the number of rounds of the specific big hit gaming state as shown in FIGS. 8 to 11 is determined as 8, 10, 12, or 16, respectively. Bonus continuation pattern data indicating a continuation pattern is stored.

FIG. 8 shows a bonus continuation pattern when the number of rounds is determined to be 8 rounds. The bonus continuation pattern when the number of rounds is determined to be 8 is the pattern no. 1-No. 25 patterns are selected from 25 patterns. The bonus continuation pattern when the number of rounds is determined to be 8 rounds is predetermined within the range of 1 to 4 individual periods and 18 to 80 expected winning numbers to be notified for each individual period. It has been. Further, the bonus continuation pattern is set such that the probability of selection increases as the number of individual periods increases. In the ROM 901 of the effect control microcomputer 900, in order to select and determine one bonus continuation pattern from the 25 bonus continuation patterns when the number of rounds in the specific jackpot gaming state is determined to be 8 rounds. A data table of bonus continuation pattern data indicating the relationship between each of the bonus continuation patterns and the value of the random counter RS4 for determining the production contents is stored. When it is determined to be a specific big hit and the number of rounds is determined to be 8 rounds, the production control microcomputer 900 uses this data table based on the extracted value of the production content determination random counter RS4. A bonus continuation pattern is randomly selected.

  FIG. 9 shows a bonus continuation pattern when the number of rounds is determined to be 10 rounds. The bonus continuation pattern when the number of rounds is determined to be 10 rounds is the pattern no. 1-No. 38 patterns are selected from 38 patterns. The bonus continuation pattern when the number of rounds is determined to be 10 rounds is determined in advance within the range of 1 to 5 individual periods and the expected number of winnings to be notified for each individual period is within the range of 18 to 100. It has been. Further, the bonus continuation pattern is set such that the probability of selection increases as the number of individual periods increases. In the ROM 901 of the performance control microcomputer 900, in order to select and determine one bonus continuation pattern from among the 38 bonus continuation patterns when the number of rounds of the specific jackpot gaming state is determined to be 10 rounds. A data table of bonus continuation pattern data indicating the relationship between each of the bonus continuation patterns and the value of the random counter RS4 for determining the production contents is stored. When it is determined to be a specific big hit and the number of rounds is determined to be 10 rounds, the production control microcomputer 900 uses this data table based on the extracted value of the production content determination random counter RS4. A bonus continuation pattern is randomly selected.

  FIG. 10 shows a bonus continuation pattern when the number of rounds is determined to be 12 rounds. The bonus continuation pattern when the number of rounds is determined to be 12 rounds is the pattern no. 1-No. 33 patterns are selected from 33 patterns. The bonus continuation pattern when the number of rounds is determined to be 12 rounds is determined in advance within the range of 1 to 6 individual periods and the expected number of winnings to be notified for each individual period is 18 to 120. It has been. Further, the bonus continuation pattern is set such that the probability of selection increases as the number of individual periods increases. In the ROM 901 of the performance control microcomputer 900, in order to select and determine one bonus continuation pattern from the 33 bonus continuation patterns when the number of rounds in the specific jackpot gaming state is determined to be 12 rounds. A data table of bonus continuation pattern data indicating the relationship between each of the bonus continuation patterns and the value of the random counter RS4 for determining the production contents is stored. When it is determined to be a specific big hit and the number of rounds is determined to be 12 rounds, the production control microcomputer 900 uses this data table based on the extracted value of the production content determination random counter RS4. A bonus continuation pattern is randomly selected.

  FIG. 11 shows a bonus continuation pattern when the number of rounds is determined to be 16 rounds. The bonus continuation pattern when the number of rounds is determined to be 16 rounds is the pattern no. 1-No. 43 patterns are selected from 43 patterns. The bonus continuation pattern when the number of rounds is determined to be 12 rounds is determined in advance within the range of 1 to 8 individual periods and the expected number of winnings to be notified for each individual period is within the range of 18 to 160. It has been. Further, the bonus continuation pattern is set such that the probability of selection increases as the number of individual periods increases. In the ROM 901 of the performance control microcomputer 900, in order to select and determine one bonus continuation pattern from among the 43 bonus continuation patterns when the number of rounds of the specific jackpot gaming state is determined to be 16 rounds. A data table of bonus continuation pattern data indicating the relationship between each of the bonus continuation patterns and the value of the random counter RS4 for determining the production contents is stored. When it is determined to be a specific big hit and the number of rounds is determined to be 16 rounds, the production control microcomputer 900 uses this data table based on the extracted value of the production content determination random counter RS4. A bonus continuation pattern is randomly selected.

  In the bonus continuation patterns shown in FIGS. 8 to 11, when a value that is not a multiple of the prescribed winning number for one round is selected as the expected winning number to be notified for the first time, the prescribed winning number to be notified for the second time is specified. The data is set so that the ratio at which a value that is not a multiple of the winning number is selected is higher than the ratio at which the expected number of winnings that is a multiple of the prescribed winning number is selected. Specifically, referring to FIG. In 3, 5, 7, 10, 13, 14, 20 to 25, a value that is not a multiple of the prescribed winning number is selected as the expected winning number to be notified at the first time, but the winning information to be notified at the second time of each pattern is selected. As the expected number, the data is set so that the ratio at which a value that is not a multiple of the specified winning number is selected is higher than the ratio at which the expected winning number that is a multiple of the specified winning number is selected. Such data setting is performed in the same manner in FIGS.

  Next, in a bonus performance performed in a specific jackpot game state, in the individual period in which the expected number of winnings is announced, the number of winnings in a certain round exceeds the prescribed number of winnings in one round, and the subsequent rounds in that individual period A description will be given of the mid-round continuation control that is performed when the number of winnings reaches the expected winning number.

  FIG. 12 is a timing chart showing the control timing of the mid-round continuation control. In FIG. 12, the relationship between the actual progress of the round and the display on the screen of the effect display device 44b is shown as time elapses.

  In FIG. 12, when the bonus continuation pattern that is the expected number of winnings for the first 20 times, the second 20 times, and the 40th time is selected for the specific jackpot gaming state in which the number of rounds is determined to be 8 rounds, In the middle of the second round of the first individual period due to the number of winnings in the first round being 12 and exceeding the prescribed number of winnings in the first round, A control example is shown when the number is said to have reached the expected number of winnings.

  In the first round (first round) in the first individual period, a bonus start effect display (“bonus” in the figure) for performing bonus notification is started and the expected number of winnings for the first individual period is displayed (see FIG. Middle “+20”) and display of the individual period winning numbers (“20.19...” In the figure) are started.

  When the number of winnings matches the specified number of winnings in each round during the first individual period, illustration is omitted, but since the number of winnings in the individual period matches the expected winning number at the end of the second round, Finally, in the period from when the first special variable winning ball device 66 is closed to when the first special variable winning ball device 66 is open at the beginning of the third round (hereinafter referred to as between rounds), Control for starting the bonus continuation effect display for performing the continuous notification for the second individual period is performed. When the display of the continuation notification is started, control for starting display of the expected number of winnings for the second individual period and starting display of the number of winnings for the individual period for the second individual period is also performed.

  However, when the number of winnings in the first round reaches the expected number of winnings in the middle of the second round during the first individual period because the number of winnings in the first round is 12, for example, and exceeds the prescribed number of winnings in the round As shown in the figure, at the timing when the number of winnings in the individual period reaches the expected number of winnings, a bonus continuous effect display ("Continue" in the figure) is performed for continuous notification for the next individual period. The control to start is performed. When the bonus continuation effect display is started, the display of the expected number of winnings in the second individual period (“+22” in the figure) is started and the number of individual period winnings in the second individual period is displayed (in the figure) “22.21...”) Is started.

  In such a case, the next second individual period starts in the middle of the second round during the first individual period. Therefore, in the second individual period in this case, the remaining number of the prescribed winning numbers in the second round in addition to the prescribed winning numbers (20) for the two rounds of the third and fourth rounds that were initially set. The first special variable winning ball device 66 receives (two) game balls. If the individual number of winnings is displayed using the originally set 20 expected winning numbers as they are, the expected number of winnings for the second individual period and the number of game balls that can actually be won. Will not match. Therefore, in order to eliminate such inconsistency, in such a case, the remaining number (2) of the prescribed winning numbers in the second round, that is, the number of winnings exceeding the first round is set to 2 Adds to the expected number of winnings for the second individual period, displays the expected number of winnings after that addition as the expected number of winnings for the second individual period, and displays two individual period winning numbers for the second individual period The number adjustment control starting from the added value (22) is performed.

  Next, in the bonus effect performed in the specific jackpot gaming state, the continuous delay control performed when the individual period winning number is insufficient with respect to the winning number in the individual period in which the expected winning number is notified will be described.

  FIG. 13 is a timing chart showing the control timing of continuous delay control. In FIG. 13, the relationship between the actual progress of the round and the display on the screen of the effect display device 44b is shown as time elapses.

  In FIG. 13, when a bonus continuation pattern that is the expected number of winnings of 20 for the first time, 20 for the second time, and 40 for the third time is selected for the specific jackpot gaming state in which the number of rounds is determined to be 8 rounds, In the first and second rounds that constitute the first individual period due to the number of winnings in the first round being 8 and insufficient for the prescribed number of winnings in the first round, the individual period winnings will be the expected number of winnings. An example of control when not reached is shown.

  In the first round (first round) in the first individual period, a bonus start effect display (“bonus” in the figure) for performing bonus notification is started and the expected number of winnings for the first individual period is displayed (see FIG. Middle “+20”) and display of the individual period winning numbers (“20.19...” In the figure) are started.

  The number of winnings in the first round is, for example, eight, and the number of winnings in the individual period is less than the expected number of winnings at the end of the second round in the first individual period due to the shortage of the prescribed number of winnings in the round. When it is insufficient, as shown in the figure, the bonus continuation is performed for the next second individual period until the timing at which the individual period winning number reaches the expected number of winnings in the next third round. Continuous delay control is performed to delay the start of the effect display from the timing between the second and third rounds, which is the initial scheduled notification timing. When the bonus continuation effect display is started, display of the expected number of winnings in the second individual period (“+18” in the figure) is started and display of the number of winnings in the individual period for the second individual period (in the figure) Control to start “18.19...”) Is performed.

In such a case, the next second individual period starts in the middle of the third round that was initially set as the second individual period. Therefore, in the second individual period in this case, the number of prizes displayed for the second individual period in the third round is changed from the predetermined number (20 pieces) for the second round of the third and fourth rounds. Therefore, the first special variable winning ball device 66 receives the number of game balls obtained by subtracting the number (2) used for the purpose. If the individual number of winnings is displayed using the originally set 20 expected winning numbers as they are, the expected number of winnings for the second individual period and the number of game balls that can actually be won. Will not match. Therefore, in order to eliminate such inconsistency, in such a case, the number (2) used for displaying the individual period winning number for the first individual period in the third round is set to the second individual number. Value obtained by subtracting the expected number of winnings for the period, displaying the expected number of winnings after the subtraction as the expected number of winnings for the second individual period, and subtracting two individual period winning numbers for the second individual period The number adjustment control starting from (18) is performed.

  Next, the overall flow of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. 14-16 is a figure for demonstrating the whole flow of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. FIG.

  Referring to FIG. 14, when a start winning is generated in the ordinary variable winning ball device 58 as shown in FIG. 14A, the special symbol display device 44a starts to display the variation of the special symbol, and the effect is shown in FIG. The display of the decorative symbols on the display device 44b is started. Thereafter, for example, as shown in (C), (D), and (H), the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed.

  When it is determined that the game state is determined to be out of the game state determination using R1, the display result of out-of-display is derived and displayed as shown in (C). When it is determined that the game state determination using R1 is 15R probability variation big hit or 15R normal big hit, as shown in FIG. In (D), the 15R probability variation jackpot display result is shown as a representative example of the 15R jackpot display result. When the game state determination using R1 is determined to be a specific jackpot, as shown in (H), a specific jackpot display result that is a chance is derived and displayed.

  When the 15R jackpot display result is derived and displayed as shown in (D), it becomes a 15R jackpot gaming state, and after being notified that the jackpot has been hit as shown in (E), the jackpot as shown in (F) After being notified of the fact, the second special variable winning ball device 48 is controlled to open the second big winning opening. The 15R jackpot gaming state ends after the second grand prize opening is opened with 15 rounds as the maximum round as shown in (G). Of these 15R jackpots, if the game state determination using R1 is determined to be a specific jackpot, and the 15R probability variable jackpot display result is derived and displayed as the display result, after the 15R jackpot gaming state ends. It becomes a high probability state that is a probability variation state. On the other hand, when the 15R normal jackpot display result is derived and displayed as the display result, a low probability state that is an uncertain change state after the 15R jackpot gaming state ends.

  When the specific jackpot display result is derived and displayed as shown in (H), the game is in a specific jackpot gaming state, and a bonus notification ("bonus" in the figure) indicating that the specific jackpot has been reached is performed as shown in (I). At the same time, after the bonus start effect display for displaying the number of consecutive bonuses (“first time” in the figure) is performed, the first special variable winning ball device 66 opens the first big winning opening as shown in (J). Is done. In the bonus start effect display, the expected number of winnings in the first individual period (“+20” in the figure), the number of consecutive bonuses, and the number of individual period winnings indicating the number of winning balls in each individual period (“COUNT 20” in the figure). ) And the number of winning balls in the entire period of the specific big hit gaming state, which indicates the cumulative number of winning numbers when the specific big hit gaming state is continuously generated ("TOTAL 0" in the figure) ) Is displayed. The display of the number of winnings for each period and the display of the cumulative number of winnings are displays relating to the counted number of winning balls, and are referred to as winning number display as a comprehensive name.

The expected number of winnings is updated and displayed to the expected number of winnings set for each individual period each time each individual period starts. In addition, the individual period winning number is set to an initial value (the expected number of winnings in the corresponding individual period) every time each individual period is started. Every time a winning ball is detected in the ball device 66, the countdown is performed (the minimum value is “0”). In addition, the cumulative number of winnings is set to an initial value (“0”) at the start of the first specific big hit gaming state after power-on of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and at the next specific big hit at the 15R big hit thereafter. During the entire period of the specific big hit gaming state, the first count switch 106 counts up each time a winning ball to the first special variable winning ball device 66 is detected. The cumulative number of winning prizes is counted through a plurality of specific big hit gaming states until a 15R normal big hit or a 15R probability variable big hit occurs.

  Next, referring to FIG. 15, when a winning ball is detected by entering the first special variable winning ball device 66 as shown in (K) in the specific jackpot gaming state, Each time is detected, as shown in (L), the individual period winnings are counted down and the cumulative winnings are counted up. Then, as shown in (M), when each individual period is ended by detecting the number of winning balls for the expected number of winnings set in each individual period, the specific jackpot gaming state continues as shown in (N). The bonus continuation effect display for performing the continuation notification indicating that this is to be performed is performed, and the next individual period starts. In the next individual period, as shown in (K) to (M), the number of individual period winnings is counted down each time a winning number is detected as shown in (O) to (Q). The cumulative number of winnings is counted up. The control states shown in (N) to (Q) are repeated according to a predetermined bonus continuation pattern until the last individual period ends. In such a bonus effect, since the total number of rounds in the specific jackpot gaming state is not notified, the player cannot know how many times the individual period continues.

  When the last individual period in the specific jackpot gaming state (when there is only one individual period as in pattern No. 1 in FIG. 7, the first individual period is the last individual period) is shown in (R) In this way, by displaying the characters “bonus end”, a bonus end effect display for performing bonus end notification for notifying that the specific big hit gaming state is ended is performed. In the bonus end effect display, the cumulative number of winnings, which is the cumulative number of winnings at that time, is displayed. Then, as shown in (S), the first special variable winning ball device 66 is closed.

  When the specific jackpot gaming state ends, the high probability state is controlled as described above. Next, referring to FIG. 16, when the high probability state is controlled, a character “high probability mode” is displayed as shown in FIG. Probability notification is performed. Such a high-probability notification is similarly performed when the big hit gaming state when the 15R probability variable big hit is completed. By performing the high-probability notification, the player can easily grasp that the player is in a high-probability state.

  In the high probability state, (A1) to (J1) perform the same variable display and operation of the apparatus as those of (A) to (J) shown in FIG. However, the cumulative number of winnings displayed in (I1) when the specific jackpot gaming state is continuously generated is the cumulative number of winnings in the particular jackpot gaming state so far.

  Next, the display of the bonus effect when the mid-round continuation control is performed due to excess of the number of winnings in the specific big hit gaming state will be described. FIG. 17 is a display screen diagram showing a bonus effect display when the mid-round continuation control is performed in the specific big hit gaming state. In FIG. 17, the state of the display screen of the effect display device 44b is shown as time elapses in (U1) to (U9).

FIG. 17 shows the state of the display screen of the effect display device 44b in the control example shown in FIG. 12 over time for the specific jackpot gaming state in which the number of rounds is determined to be 8 rounds. As shown in (U1), after the first round is started and the display corresponding to the first round is started, as shown in (U2), the number of winnings in the first round is 12 and 1 The specified number of rounds was exceeded. Then, the second round is started as shown in (U2), and the number of winning prizes is counted as shown in (U3). Thereafter, as shown in (U4), in the middle of the second round during the first individual period, the number of individual period winnings reached the expected number of winnings. Thereby, at the timing when the number of winnings reaches the expected number of winnings, as shown in (U5), a bonus continuation effect for performing continuous notification for the next second individual period (third and fourth rounds). Control for starting display ("continuation" in the figure) is performed. When the bonus continuation effect display is started, as shown in (U5), the number of winnings exceeding the first round is added to the expected number of winnings in the second individual period, and the winning expectation after the addition is added. Starts displaying the expected number of winnings (“+22” in the figure) with the number as the expected number of winnings for the second individual period, and adds the number of individual winnings for the second individual period by the number of extra winnings Control is started from the set values (22).

  As shown in (U6) to (U8), the second individual period ends at the end of the fourth round because there are no more prizes in the third round. In that case, as shown in (U9), the fourth round, which is the final round of the second individual period, and the fifth round, which is the first (first) round of the next third individual period The bonus continuation effect display starts. In that case, since there are no excess winning numbers and insufficient winning numbers, in the third individual period (5th to 8th rounds), as shown in (U9) and (U10), a predetermined expected winning number is set. Display ("+40" in the figure) is started, and the control for starting the display of the individual period winning number for the third individual period from the preset expected winning number (40) is performed.

  Next, the display of the bonus effect when the continuous delay control is performed due to the shortage of the number of winnings in the specific big hit gaming state will be described. FIG. 18 is a display screen diagram showing a display of a bonus effect when continuous delay control is performed in a specific big hit gaming state. In FIG. 18, the state of the display screen of the effect display device 44b is shown as time elapses in (V1) to (V8).

  FIG. 18 shows the state of the display screen of the effect display device 44b in the control example shown in FIG. 13 over time for the specific jackpot gaming state in which the number of rounds is determined to be 8 rounds. As shown in (V1), after the first round is started and the display corresponding to the first round is started, as shown in (V2), the number of winnings in the first round is 8 and 1 There was a shortage of the number of regular winnings in the round. Then, as shown in (V2), the second round was started, and as shown in (V3), the number of individual period winnings was insufficient with respect to the expected number of winnings at the end of the second round. At that time, the continuous notification is not performed at the timing between the rounds of the second and third rounds, which is the initial scheduled notification timing, and the timing of performing the continuous notification is delayed to the next round. Then, as shown in (V4), when the number of winnings for the individual period reaches the expected number of winnings in the next third round, at that time, as shown in (V5), the continuation for the second individual period is continued. The bonus continuation effect display for informing is started. When the bonus continuation effect display is started, as shown in (V5), the display of the expected number of winnings in the second individual period ("+18" in the figure) is started and the individual for the second individual period is started. Control for starting the display of the number of winnings during the period (“18.19... In the figure”) is performed.

  As a result, when the number of winnings is insufficient with respect to the expected number of winnings at the end of the second round, the next second individual period is set until the timing when the number of winnings reaches the expected winning number in the next third round. Continuous delay control is performed to delay the start of the bonus continuation effect display for performing continuous notification as a target from the timing between the second and third rounds, which is the initial scheduled notification timing.

As shown in (V6), the second individual period ends at the end of the fourth round because there is no excess winning number or insufficient winning number with respect to the expected winning number at the end of the fourth round. In that case, as shown in (V7), the bonus continues between the fourth round, which is the final round of the second individual period, and the fifth round, which is the first round of the next third individual period. Production display is started. In that case, since there are no excess or deficient numbers, in the third individual period (5th to 8th rounds), as shown in (V7) and (V8), a preset expected number of winnings is displayed. ("+40" in the figure) is started, and the control for starting the display of the individual period winning number for the third individual period from the preset expected number (40) is performed.

  FIG. 19 is a flowchart for explaining a main process program executed by the game control microcomputer 99. In the main process in the present embodiment, when the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the game control microcomputer 99 performs a necessary initial setting process in the main process.

  First, in step SA (hereinafter, simply referred to as SA) 1, a process for setting the interrupt prohibition is performed. Next, in SA2, processing for setting the interrupt mode to interrupt mode 2 is performed. In SA3, processing for setting a stack pointer designation address in the stack pointer is performed. In SA4, an internal device register initialization process is performed. In SA5, initialization processing of a CTC (counter / timer) which is a built-in device (built-in peripheral circuit) is performed. In SA6, processing for setting the RAM 111 to an accessible state is performed. Interrupt mode 2 in the present embodiment and interrupt requests from each built-in device can be easily processed, and interrupt processing can be provided at an arbitrary position in the program. In this mode, it is also easy to prepare each interrupt process for each interrupt generation factor.

  Next, in SA7, the clear switch 97a provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is pressed, and processing for determining whether or not the detection signal is set to the on state is performed. If it is determined in SA7 that the clear switch 97a is in the on state, the process proceeds to SA10 described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in SA8 that the clear switch 97a is not in the on state, the data protection process for the backup RAM area (when the power is cut off in SA8) For example, processing for determining whether or not parity data has been added is performed.

  In the present embodiment, when an unexpected power interruption occurs, a process for protecting data in the backup RAM area is performed. When such protection processing is performed, it is assumed that there is a backup. That is, when it is determined that there is no backup, the game control microcomputer 99 executes initial processing after SA10. When it is determined in SA8 that there is a backup, a game state recovery process is performed in SA9 to return the internal state of the main board 120 to the state before the power cut. Then, the contrast value of the PC (program counter) stored in the backup RAM area is reset to the PC, and the process proceeds to SA13 described later. In SA10, processing for clearing the storage buffer of the RAM 111 mounted on the game control microcomputer 99 is performed. An initial value setting process for setting an initial value in a predetermined work area is also performed.

  In SA11, a process for initializing the sub-boards (effect control board 90, payout control board 98, voice frame lamp board 92, etc.) is performed. In SA12, a CTC register provided in the CPU 112 of the game control microcomputer 99 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every 2 msec. That is, an initial value corresponding to 2 msec is set in a predetermined register (time counting register).

In SA13 to SA15, main loop processing is executed. First, in SA13, processing for setting the interrupt disabled state is performed. In SA14, a specific random number update process is performed. In the specific random number update process, the random counter R2 for determining the special symbol, the random counter R3 for determining the number of rounds, the random counter R4 for determining the variation pattern, and the random counter R5 for determining the reach are updated. In SA15, processing for setting the interrupt permitted state is performed. Note that interrupt inhibition is realized by issuing an interrupt inhibition instruction, disabling an interrupt prohibition register, or setting a mask register. On the other hand, interrupt permission is realized by issuing an interrupt permission instruction, setting an interrupt prohibition register to permit, or resetting a mask register.

  The specific random number update process of SA14 in the present embodiment is executed in an interrupt prohibited state. Therefore, maskable interrupts such as timer interrupts are not applied when the specific random number update process is being executed. That is, the specific random number update process is executed without being interrupted by the interrupt process. In the present embodiment, the built-in CTC of the CPU 112 is set so as to repeatedly generate a timer interrupt. Furthermore, the repetition period is set to 2 msec. When a timer interrupt occurs, a timer interrupt process as illustrated in FIG. 20 is executed.

  FIG. 20 is a flowchart for explaining a timer interrupt processing program. The timer interrupt process in this embodiment is started every 2 msec.

  First, in step SB (hereinafter simply referred to as SB) 1, a power-off process is performed. In the power-off process, the power confirmation signal is determined. If the power-off process is not being performed, the backup monitoring timer is cleared. On the other hand, the backup monitoring timer is updated and determined if the power is cut off, and if the power is cut off, the checksum buffer is set, the RAM is disabled, the CTC is set, and the power check signal is monitored.

  In SB2, switch processing is performed. In the switch process, the states of the gate switch 62, the start port switch 60, the first count switch 106, the specific ball detector 51, and the second count switch 52 are input, and a process of determining their detection state is performed.

  In SB3, display control processing is performed. In the display control process, a drive signal for controlling the display state of the special symbol display device 44a and the normal symbol display device 63 and a drive signal for controlling the lighting state of the special symbol start memory LED 46 and the normal symbol start memory LED 64 are displayed. Output processing is performed.

  In SB4, an abnormal winning notification process is performed. In the abnormal winning notification process, the first count switch 106 provided in the first special variable winning ball device 66 is in an ON state even though the first special variable winning ball device 66 is not opened. When the second count switch 52 provided in the second special variable winning ball device 48 is in the ON state even though the second special variable winning ball device 48 is not open. Then, processing for setting an abnormal winning notification command for notifying that an abnormal winning has been made is performed.

  In SB5, random number update processing for updating each of the random counters R2 to R6 described above is performed.

  In SB6, a special symbol process is performed. In the special symbol process, a process for selecting and executing the corresponding process is performed according to the value of the special symbol process flag for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a predetermined order according to the gaming state. The value of the special symbol process flag is updated during each process according to the gaming state.

In SB7, a normal symbol process is performed. In normal symbol process,
According to the value of the normal symbol process flag for controlling the lighting of the normal symbol display device 63 in a predetermined manner, a process for selecting and executing the corresponding process is performed. The value of the normal symbol process flag is updated during each process according to the gaming state.

  In SB8, an effect command control process is performed. In the effect command control process, an effect control command used for effect control such as control for displaying an effect image corresponding to the gaming state on the effect display device 44b is output to the effect control microcomputer 900.

  In SB9, an information output process is performed. In the information output process, game information necessary for business management of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, jackpot information for notifying that the jackpot gaming state is in effect, time variation information for notifying that the jackpot status is changing after the jackpot state is ended) , Starting port information for informing the number of game balls in which the starting port switch 60 is turned on, symbol determination number of times 1 information for informing the number of times of variation of the special symbol display device 44a, and the number of times of opening / closing the first special variable winning ball device 66 Information on the number of times of an action to notify the number of times of movement of the normal symbol display device 63, information on the number of times of determining the number of movements of the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 58, etc. Processing for outputting to the hall management computer to be installed is performed.

  In SB10, a prize ball process is performed. In the prize ball processing, the number of prize balls is set based on a detection signal from a switch for detecting a prize at each prize opening. For example, a payout control command is output to the payout control board 98 in response to winning detection. The payout control microcomputer mounted on the payout control board 98 drives the ball payout device 154 according to the payout control command.

  In SB11, a test terminal process is performed. In the test terminal processing, the setting during special symbol change, the setting per special symbol, the setting during operation of the first special variable winning ball device 66, the setting during operation of the second special variable winning ball device 48, the normal variable winning ball device 58 is operating The process of outputting each signal such as the setting of “1” and the setting during normal symbol fluctuation is executed.

  In SB12, an output process is performed. In the output process, an output process for outputting a drive signal for driving the corresponding solenoid when a predetermined condition is satisfied is performed. Based on the drive signal output in the output process, the solenoid is driven, and the corresponding device is controlled to an open state or a closed state. In the following description, the process of driving the solenoid or stopping the driving of the solenoid is performed by the output process of SB12.

  In SB13, a storage process is performed. In the storage process, a process for setting a drive signal for controlling the lighting state of the special symbol start storage LED 46 and the normal symbol start storage LED 64 is performed.

  In SB14, a special symbol display control process is performed. In the special symbol display control process, a process for setting a drive signal for controlling the display state of the special symbol display device 44a is performed. In SB15, a normal symbol display control process is performed. In the normal symbol display control process, a process for setting a drive signal for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display device 63 is performed.

In SB16, a status indicator display process is performed. In the status display lamp display process, a status display lamp display process for controlling the status display lamp is performed. In the status display lamp display processing in the present embodiment, when the gaming state is the short-time status, processing for updating the status display timer, setting the status indicator flashing, and the status indicator flashing speed, etc. Is done. In SB17, processing for setting the interrupt permitted state is performed. As a result, the interrupt is not enabled until all timer interrupt processing is executed, so no other interrupts or next timer interrupts are generated, and all timer interrupt processing is in progress. Each process can be reliably completed.

  FIG. 21 is a flowchart for explaining a subroutine program of special symbol process processing in SB6. As described above, in the special symbol process, processing corresponding to the value of the special symbol process flag is executed.

  First, in step SD (hereinafter simply referred to as “SD”) 1, a process is performed to determine whether or not a game ball has won (start winning) a normal variable winning ball device 58 provided in the gaming board 40. . Specifically, while the timer interrupt process of FIG. 20 is performed twice, a process of determining whether or not the input signal from the start port switch 60 is in an on state is performed. When it is determined at SD1 that there has been a start winning (when the input signal from the start port switch 60 is on while the timer interrupt process is performed twice), the start port switch passing process is performed by SD2. Do.

  In the start port switch passing process of SD2, when the start port switch 60 is turned on (specifically, when it is determined that the value of the switch timer provided corresponding to the start port switch 60 has reached a predetermined value or more). ) Confirms whether the number of numerical data stored in the reserved storage buffer of the RAM 111 (the number of stored storage) has reached the upper limit, and the number of stored numerical data stored in the reserved storage buffer reaches the maximum value. If not, it is determined whether or not the above-described random number read flag is set. If it is set, the count value of the hold storage counter indicating the hold storage number is incremented by one. Then, the R1 numerical data from the random number generation circuit 60a and the numerical data of the round counters R3 to R3 are extracted, and these correspond to the extraction order of the reserved storage buffer (corresponding to the value of the reserved storage counter). ) Processing to store in the storage area is executed. Here, the extraction of R1 numerical data from the random number generation circuit 60a is performed by inputting an output control signal to the random number generation circuit 60a and reading out the numerical data of R1 stored as the random number value updated by the random number generation circuit 60a. Is done. Thus, when the start port switch 60 is turned on and the number of numerical data stored in the holding storage buffer (the number of holding storage) does not reach the upper limit value, the condition for extracting the numerical data is satisfied, An execution condition for executing the fluctuation display, that is, a starting condition for the fluctuation display is established.

  When it is determined that the start port switch 60 is not turned on in SD1 and after the start port switch passing process is performed in SD2, the first big winning port winning ball count described later with reference to FIG. After performing the process and performing the second grand prize opening winning ball counting process by SD4, any one of SD5 to SD14 is executed according to the value of the special symbol process flag.

  In the SD3 first grand prize opening winning ball counting process, a process for counting the winning balls that have entered the first special variable winning ball device 66 is performed based on the detection signal of the first count switch 106. In the SD4 second grand prize opening winning ball counting process, a process for counting the winning balls that have entered the second special variable winning ball device 48 is performed based on the detection signal of the second count switch 52.

  In SD5, special symbol normal processing, which will be described later with reference to FIG. 23, is performed. In the special symbol normal process, the determination of the gaming state as described above is performed based on the count value extracted from R1, and the stop symbol (specific jackpot symbol, 15R probability variation big hit symbol, 15R normal big hit symbol, or off symbol) is determined. Then, a process of updating the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol variation setting process of SD6 is performed.

  In SD6, special symbol variation setting processing is performed. In the special symbol variation setting process, the reach determination as described above is performed using the reach determination random counter R5 when the result of the game state determination is a disappointing display result. Then, based on a predetermined determination result such as a game state determination result and a reach determination result, the variation pattern table is selected, the value of the random counter R4 for determining the variation pattern is extracted, and the variation varies according to the value of R4. By selecting and determining a variation pattern to be executed from among a plurality of types of variation patterns set in the pattern table, a variation pattern for variation display on the special symbol display device 44a and the effect display device 44b is selected and determined.

  Also, after setting the variation display time (the time from the start of variation to the time when the display result is derived and displayed) for the variation display on the special symbol display device 44a based on the variation pattern selected and determined in the special symbol process timer. Start the special symbol process timer. In addition, a drive signal for starting the special symbol variation display is set. The drive signal set here is output at SB14 in FIG. In addition, a variation pattern command which is an effect control command for instructing a variation pattern including information on the length of the variation display time of the decorative design is set. The variation pattern command set here is output to the production control microcomputer 900 in SB8 of FIG. As a result, display control for variably displaying decorative symbols is performed in the effect display device 44b by the effect control microcomputer 900. Then, a process of updating the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process of SD7 is performed.

  In SD7, special symbol variation processing is performed. In the special symbol variation process, when the variation display time in the variation pattern selected and determined in the variation setting processing has elapsed (the special symbol process timer set in SD6 has timed out), the value of the special symbol process flag is changed to the SD8 special symbol. A process of updating to a value corresponding to the symbol stop process is performed.

  In SD8, a special symbol stop process described later with reference to FIG. 25 is performed. In the special symbol stop process, the special symbol display device 44a and the effect display device 44b are controlled so as to stop the symbols variably displayed. Specifically, a drive signal for stopping the special symbol is set. The drive signal set here is output at SB14 in FIG. Then, a symbol stop command which is an effect control command for stopping the decorative symbol is set. The symbol stop command set here is output to the production control microcomputer 900 in SB8 of FIG. When the special jackpot flag, which is a flag indicating that it has been determined that the game is determined to be a special jackpot, is set, the value of the special symbol process flag corresponds to the pre-processing for opening the first big winning opening in SD9. Update to the value you want. In addition, a 15R probability variable big hit flag, which is a flag indicating that it has been determined that the game is determined to be a 15R probability variable big hit, or a 15R normal big hit flag, which is a flag indicating that it has been determined to be a 15R normal big hit, is set. If so, a process of updating the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the pre-opening process of the second big winning opening in SD11 is performed. On the other hand, when none of the big hit flags is set, a process of updating the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process of SD5 is performed.

  In SD9, a pre-opening process for the first big prize opening which will be described later with reference to FIG. 26 is performed. In the pre-opening process for the first big winning opening, updating the round number counter that is a counter for counting the number of rounds in the specific big hit gaming state, various settings for driving the opening / closing piece 81 of the first special variable winning ball device 66, In addition, an effect control command (round start command) for designating the start of the round is transmitted. Then, a process of updating the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the process of opening the first big prize opening of SD10 is performed.

  In SD10, processing during opening of the first big prize opening is performed. In the first grand prize opening opening process, the first special variable prize winning is performed by intermittently opening and closing the open / close piece 81 by driving the solenoid 105 based on the setting in the first big prize opening pre-processing. The first big prize opening 82 of the ball device 66 is intermittently opened. Thereafter, the completion of the round end condition is confirmed based on the number of winnings and the number of opening / closing of the opening / closing piece 81 as described above, and when the end condition is satisfied, the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing piece 81 in the round is ended. When the end condition of the round is established, the process of updating the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the pre-opening process of the first big prize opening of SD9 is performed in the case other than the final round. Processing for updating the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing of SD5 is performed. Further, in the first grand prize opening opening process, a process for transmitting a round end command which is an effect control command for designating that the round has ended at the end of the round is performed. The round end command is a command that can specify the ended round.

  In SD11, pre-opening processing for the second big prize opening is performed. In the process for opening the second grand prize opening, a process for starting control for opening the second big prize opening of the second special variable winning ball apparatus 48 is performed. Specifically, the count and the flag are initialized, and the solenoid 65 is driven to open the opening / closing plate 49 of the second special variable winning ball device 48, so that the second special variable winning ball device 48 has a first state. A process of opening the two major winning openings is performed. In addition, the execution time of the second large winning opening opening process of SD12 is set, and the process of updating the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second large winning opening opening process of SD12 is performed. In the second big winning opening opening pre-process, a process for transmitting a 15R jackpot effect command as an effect control command for designating the display of the effect image for the occurrence of 15R jackpot is performed. Thereby, the effect display microcomputer 44 controls the effect display device 44b to display the effect image for the occurrence of 15R big hit. In SD11, the values of the bonus number counter (see SR8) for counting the number of consecutive bonuses and the cumulative prize number counter (see SS2) for counting the cumulative number of winnings are reset.

  In SD12, the second big prize opening opening process is performed. In the second big prize opening opening process, it is confirmed that the control for transmitting the presentation control command of round display during the big hit gaming state to the microcomputer 900 for the presentation control and the closing condition of the second special variable winning ball device 48 is established. The process etc. to perform are performed. When the closing condition is satisfied, a process of updating the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the post-second opening process of the second big winning opening in SD13 is performed. Further, in the second big prize opening opening process, a process for transmitting an effect control command designating display of the big hit effect image is performed. Thereby, the effect display microcomputer 44 controls the effect display device 44b to display the effect image during the big hit.

  In SD13, a process after opening the second big prize opening is performed. In the processing after the second big prize opening opening, the presence or absence of passage of the specific ball detector 51 provided in the second special variable winning ball device 48 is monitored to confirm that the continuation condition of the 15R big hit gaming state is satisfied. Perform processing. When the continuation condition for the 15R big hit gaming state is satisfied and there are still rounds, control is performed to transmit the production control command for the round continuation display during the 15R big hit gaming state to the production control microcomputer 900. A process of updating the value of the symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the pre-opening process of the second big winning opening in SD11 is performed. In addition, if the continuation condition of the 15R big hit gaming state is not satisfied within a predetermined effective time, or if all rounds are finished, the value of the special symbol process flag corresponds to the 15R big hit end processing of SD14. Processing to update the value is performed.

  In SD14, 15R big hit end processing is performed. In the 15R big hit end processing, at the end of the 15R big hit gaming state by 15R probability change big hit, the probability change flag which is a flag indicating the probability change state is set to the ON state, and the probability change flag set to the ON state is 15R normal At the end of 15R jackpot gaming state due to jackpot, it is reset to the off state in SD14. Further, in the 15R big hit end process, a process for transmitting an effect control command for designating the display of the effect image for the 15R big hit end is performed. Thereby, the effect display microcomputer 44 controls the effect display device 44b to display the effect image for the end of the 15R big hit. In the 15R jackpot end process, the control for causing the microcomputer 900 for effect control to perform display control for displaying the effect image for the end of the 15R jackpot that notifies the player that the 15R jackpot game state has ended. Is done. Further, in the 15R big hit end process, a process for transmitting an effect control command for designating the display of the effect image for the 15R big hit end is performed. Thereby, the effect display microcomputer 44 controls the effect display device 44b to display the effect image for the end of the 15R big hit. Then, a process of updating the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process of SD5 is performed.

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart for explaining a subroutine program of SD3 first winning slot winning ball counting process. In step SE (hereinafter simply referred to as SE) 1, the first count switch 106 is in the on state (when the input signal from the first count switch 106 is in the on state while the timer interrupt process is performed twice). Processing is performed to determine whether or not. In SE1, when it is determined that the first count switch 106 is in the ON state, a process of adding and updating the first winning ball counter by “1” is performed in SE2. The first winning ball counter is a counter for counting the winning balls that have entered the first special variable winning ball device 66 in the specific jackpot gaming state. Then, in SE3, a first winning ball detection command is set as an effect control command for designating that a winning ball that has entered the first special variable winning ball device 66 is detected, and the process returns. The first winning ball detection command set here is output to the production control microcomputer 900 in SB8 of FIG. Thereby, the production control microcomputer 900 can recognize that there is a winning ball that has entered the first special variable winning ball device 66 in the specific big hit gaming state.

  FIG. 23 is a flowchart for explaining a subroutine program of the special symbol normal processing of SD5.

  First, in step SF (hereinafter simply referred to as SF) 1, processing is performed to determine whether or not the number of reserved memories, which is the value of the reserved memory counter, is “0”. If the number of reserved memories in the reserved memory buffer is not “0”, the random number values of the random counters R1 and R3 corresponding to the value “1” of the reserved memory counter stored first in the reserved memory buffer are read in SF2. Processing is performed.

  Next, in SF3, a process of erasing the random number value read in SF2 from the storage area is performed. Next, the process proceeds to SF4, where the value of the hold storage counter is decremented by 1, and the random number value stored in the hold storage buffer is shifted to the area corresponding to the hold storage counter that is one smaller. It is.

Next, in SF5, a gaming state determination process is executed based on the count value read in SF2. In this gaming state determination process, various processes such as a process for determining which gaming state is selected among a specific jackpot, a 15R probability variation jackpot, a 15R normal jackpot, and a loss, and a process for determining a special symbol stop symbol are performed. It is. In SF6, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process.

  FIG. 24 is a flowchart for explaining a subroutine program of the gaming state determination process of SF5. First, in step SG (hereinafter simply referred to as SG) 1, processing for determining whether or not the probability variation flag is set to the on state is performed. The probability variation flag is a flag that is set to the ON state in the probability variation state that is a high probability state, and is set in SD10 at the end of the specific jackpot gaming state, and is set in SD14 at the end of the 15R jackpot gaming state due to the 15R probability variation jackpot. Is done. Then, the probability variation flag set to the on state is reset to the off state in SD14 at the end of the 15R big hit gaming state due to the 15R normal big hit.

  When it is determined by SG1 that the probability variation flag is in the on state, the determination value of the gaming state used in the high probability state as shown in FIG. 3B is selected by SG2 as the determination value used for determining the gaming state To do. On the other hand, when it is determined by SG1 that the probability variation flag is in the off state, the determination value of the gaming state used in the low probability state as shown in FIG. Select.

  Then, the value of the random counter R1 read in SF2 of FIG. 23 is determined as the specific jackpot determination value by using the game state determination value selected by SG2 or SG3 depending on whether or not the probability change state is SG4. Processing is performed to determine whether or not they match. When it is determined by SG4 that they match, SG5 performs a process of randomly determining the number of rounds as described above based on the value of the random counter R3 read in SF2 of FIG.

  Then, SG6 sets any one of the 2R specific big hit flag, the 8R specific big hit flag, the 10R specific big hit flag, the 12R specific big hit flag, and the 16R specific big hit flag to the on state based on the number of rounds determined in SG5. Is done. Specifically, when two rounds are determined, the 2R specific big hit flag indicating that the second round is a special big hit is set to an on state. When the 8th round is determined, the 8R specific big hit flag indicating that the 8 rounds are the special big hit is set to an on state. When 10 rounds are determined, the 10R specific big hit flag indicating the 10 round specific big hit is turned on. When 12 rounds are determined, the 12R specific big hit flag indicating the 12 round specific big hit is turned on. When 16 rounds are determined, the 16R specific big hit flag indicating that the 16 rounds will be the special big hit is turned on.

  Then, the count value of the random counter R2 for determining the stop symbol is extracted by SG7, and one of a plurality of types of specific jackpot symbols is stopped and displayed as described above based on the count value by SG8. Randomly determined as a special symbol, and data indicating the determined special symbol is stored. Next, in SG9, as an effect control command, among 2R specific big hit symbol designation command, 8R specific big hit symbol designation command, 10R specific big hit symbol designation command, 12R specific big hit symbol designation command, and 16R specific big hit symbol designation command, A process of setting a specific jackpot symbol designation command for designating a round corresponding to the number of rounds indicated by the specific jackpot flag turned on by SG6 is performed, and the process proceeds to SG23 described later.

Also, when it is determined by SG4 that it does not match the specific jackpot determination value, the value of the random counter R1 read in SF2 of FIG. 23 using the determination value of the gaming state selected by SG2 or SG3 by SG10 However, a process for determining whether or not the value matches the 15R probability variation big hit determination value is performed. When it is determined by SG10 that they match,
SG11 performs processing for setting the 15R probability variation big hit flag to the ON state.

  Then, the count value of the random symbol R2 for determining the stop symbol is extracted by SG12, and one of the plural types of 15R probability variation big hit symbols is stopped and displayed as described above based on the count value by SG13. Randomly determined as a special symbol to be performed, and data indicating the determined special symbol is stored. Next, in SG14, a process of setting a 15R probability variation big hit symbol designation command as an effect control command is performed, and the process proceeds to SG23 described later.

  Further, when it is determined by SG10 that the value does not coincide with the 15R probability variation jackpot determination value, the random counter R1 read in SF2 of FIG. Processing is performed to determine whether or not the value matches the 15R normal big hit determination value. When it is determined by SG15 that they match, SG16 performs processing for setting the 15R normal big hit flag to the ON state.

  Then, the count value of the random counter R2 for determining the stop symbol is extracted by SG17, and as described above, any of the plural types of 15R normal big hit symbols is stopped and displayed based on the count value by SG18. Randomly determined as a special symbol to be performed, and data indicating the determined special symbol is stored. Next, in SG19, a process of setting a 15R normal jackpot symbol designation command as an effect control command is performed, and the process proceeds to SG23 described later.

  Further, when it is determined by SG15 that the value does not match the 15R normal big hit determination value, the value of the random counter R1 read in SF2 of FIG. 23 matches the deviation determination value, and SG20 determines the stop symbol. The count value of the random counter R2 is extracted, and as described above, one of a plurality of types of outlier symbols is randomly determined as a special symbol to be stopped and displayed by the SG 21 based on the count value. Data indicating the special symbol made is stored. Next, in SG22, a process of setting an outlier designating command as an effect control command is performed, and the process proceeds to SG23 described later.

  In the gaming state determination process, symbol designating commands are set in SG9, SG14, SG19, and SG22. These symbol designating commands are output to the effect control microcomputer 900 in SB8 in FIG. Thereby, in the production control microcomputer 900, it is possible to grasp the variation display result of the special symbol, the type of jackpot, and the number of rounds of jackpot.

  In SG23, a process of setting the symbols determined in SG8, SG13, SG18, and SG21 as a scheduled stop symbol scheduled to be stopped in the variable display on the special symbol display device 44a is performed, and the gaming state determination process is ended.

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart for explaining a subroutine program of the special symbol stop process of SD7. First, in step SH (hereinafter simply referred to as SH) 1, a process for determining whether or not any specific big hit flag set in SG9 of FIG. 24 is in an on state is performed. When it is determined in SH1 that any of the special jackpot flags is in the ON state, a process of updating the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the pre-opening process of the first big winning opening in SD9 is performed in SH2. The special symbol stop process is terminated. Thereby, it is possible to shift to the specific big hit gaming state.

On the other hand, when it is determined in SH1 that none of the specific big hit flags is in the ON state, in SH3, the 15R probability variable big hit flag set in SG11 in FIG. 24 and the 15R normal state set in ON state in SG16 in FIG. Processing is performed to determine whether one of the big hit flags is in the on state. When it is determined in SH3 that one of the flags is in the ON state, in SH4, a process of updating the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second big prize opening pre-processing in SD11 is performed. The symbol stop process is terminated. Thereby, it can be made to transfer to 15R big hit game state.

  If it is determined in SH3 that neither flag is in the ON state, in SH5, the special symbol process flag value is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process in SD5, and the special symbol stop process is performed. finish. Thereby, it is possible to shift to a state in which a variable display is possible according to the start winning prize.

  FIG. 26 is a flow chart for explaining a subroutine program of the pre-opening process of the first big winning opening in SD9.

  First, in step SJ (hereinafter simply referred to as SJ) 1, a process of adding and updating the value of the round number counter by 1 is performed. As a result, the round number counter is updated at the start of each round in the specific jackpot gaming state. Therefore, the game control microcomputer 99 refers to the value of the round number counter to determine the current round in the specific jackpot gaming state. It is possible to know how many rounds are.

  Next, the driving pattern (opening time and closing time pattern) of the opening / closing piece 81 (opening / closing piece solenoid 105) that performs an intermittent opening operation as shown in FIG. 4 is set by SJ2. As a result, driving of the solenoid 105 for the opening / closing piece is started with the set drive pattern, and the opening / closing piece 81 performs the opening / closing operation. In SJ3, data corresponding to the driving time of the opening / closing piece 81 for one round that opens and closes 18 times is set in a predetermined processing timer. The processing timer set in this way is counted down each time the first big prize opening opening process of SD10 is executed. Then, when the processing timer counts up, the 18th opening / closing of the opening / closing piece 81 is completed. Next, in SJ3, a round start command is set that indicates that the round has started and that can specify the number of rounds indicated by the round number counter. The round start command set here is output to the effect control microcomputer 900 in SB8 of FIG. By transmitting a round start command capable of specifying the number of rounds in this way, the production control microcomputer 900 can grasp how many rounds have been started in the specific big hit state. Then, by SJ5, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the processing of the first big winning opening in SD10, and the process returns.

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart for explaining a subroutine program of the processing during opening of the first big prize opening of SD10.

  First, in step SK (hereinafter, simply referred to as SK) 1, every time the first big prize opening opening process is executed by SJ3, a process of subtracting "1" from the set process timer value is performed. . As a result, the processing timer is counted down each time the first big prize opening opening process is executed. Then, by determining whether or not the value of the processing timer is “0” by SK2, whether or not the end condition of one round is satisfied based on the number of opening / closing of the opening / closing piece 81 (18 opening / closing). It is confirmed.

When it is determined by SK2 that the value of the processing timer is “0”, it is determined that the round end condition is satisfied, and the process proceeds to SK4. On the other hand, when it is determined by SK2 that the value of the processing timer is not “0”, whether or not the value of the first winning ball counter updated by SE2 is “10” or more is determined in SK3. As a result of the determination, it is confirmed based on the number of winning prizes (10 winning prizes) whether or not an end condition for one round is satisfied. When it is determined by SK3 that the value is not "10" or more, it is determined that the end condition for one round is not yet satisfied, and the process returns. On the other hand, when it is determined by SK3 that the value is “10” or more, it is determined that the end condition of one round is satisfied, and the process proceeds to SK4.

  In SK4, a round end command capable of specifying the number of rounds indicated by the round number counter is set. The round end command set here is output to the production control microcomputer 900 in SB8 of FIG. By transmitting a round end command capable of specifying the number of rounds in this way, the production control microcomputer 900 can grasp how many rounds have ended in the specific big hit state. Then, the value of the first winning ball counter is initialized (initialized to “0”) by SK5.

  Next, based on the number of rounds indicated by the round number counter, it is determined by SK6 whether the completed round is the final round (the number of rounds specified by the probability variation jackpot flag set in SG6). When it is determined by SK6 that it is not the final round, a process of updating the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first big winning opening releasing process of SD9 is performed by SK11, and the process returns. As a result, in the specific big hit gaming state, the round in which the condition for ending the round is satisfied is completed, and the next round is advanced. On the other hand, when it is determined by SK6 that it is the final round, the value of the round number counter is initialized (initialized to “0”) by SK7. By SK8, it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag is set to the on state. When it is determined by SK8 that the probability variation flag is not in the on state, the probability variation flag is set in the on state by SK9, and the process proceeds to SK10. Thus, at the end of the specific big hit gaming state, the probability variation flag is always turned on, so that the high probability state is controlled. On the other hand, when it is determined by SK8 that the probability variation flag is in the on state, since it is already in the high probability state, the process proceeds to SK10 as it is to continue the high probability state. In SK10, a process of updating the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process of SD5 is performed, and the process returns. As a result, the specific jackpot gaming state ends.

  In the specific jackpot gaming state, the first big winning opening opening pre-processing and the first big winning opening opening process described above are repeatedly executed until the round randomly determined as the number of rounds in the specific big winning gaming state is completed. By doing so, the round continues up to 2 rounds, 8 rounds, 10 rounds, 12 rounds, or 16 rounds.

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart for explaining the program for the production control main process, and (b) is a flowchart for explaining the program for the timer interrupt process. First, in step SN (hereinafter simply referred to as SN) 1, initialization processing is performed. In the initialization process, when the initialization process in SA11 is executed, all the stored contents stored in the RAM mounted on the effect control board 90 are erased, and new initial values of the respective parameters (for example, “0”) is set. Next, in SN2, random number update processing for updating count values of various random counters used for effect control is performed.

Next, in SN3, it is determined whether or not a timer interrupt flag is set. When it is determined that the timer interrupt flag is not set, the process returns to SN2. When it is determined that the timer interrupt flag is set, the timer interrupt flag is cleared at SN4, and then the command analysis process is performed at SN5. Done.

  In the command analysis process of SN5, various commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 99 are received, and a process of analyzing the received command is performed.

  Next, in SN6, based on the internal flags including the above-described various flags set according to the production control command, the production content is determined as shown below, and the decided production content is displayed on the production display device 44b. Display control process processing is performed. Data for selecting and determining various effects shown below, and data for executing these various effects are stored in the ROM 901 or the like mounted on the effect control board 90.

  In SN7, sound and lamp control command processing is performed. This sound and lamp control command processing is based on various commands input from the game control microcomputer 99 to the effect control microcomputer 900, game sounds generated from the speakers 12a, 12b, various decoration LEDs / lamps 32, various Commands are set for lighting patterns such as game effect LEDs and lamps, and corresponding sounds and lamp driving signals are output to the control target device. Thereby, an effect synchronized with the display state on the effect display device 44b can be performed.

  In FIG. 28B, a timer interrupt process is performed. In SN8, a timer interrupt flag is set. This timer interrupt flag is set every 33 msec in this embodiment. In SN9, interrupt permission is granted and the timer interrupt process is terminated.

  Next, command analysis processing by SN5 will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart for explaining a subroutine program of command analysis processing in SN5.

  In the command analysis process, it is determined by SP1 whether there is a reception command in the command reception buffer. Here, when the production control microcomputer 900 receives a command, the received command is stored in the command reception buffer. If it is determined by SP1 that there is no received command, the process returns. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a reception command, the reception command is read out by SP2. The command data read here is erased in the command reception buffer. Then, SP3 determines whether or not the read reception command is the above-described symbol designation command. If it is determined that the symbol is a symbol designation command, a symbol designation flag as a flag that can specify the content of the command is set to an on state corresponding to the received symbol designation command, and the process returns to SP1.

Specifically, in SP3, a flag is set as follows. When a missing symbol designation command is received, a missing symbol designation flag indicating that the command has been received is set. When a 2R specific jackpot symbol designation command is received, a 2R specific jackpot symbol designation flag indicating that the command has been received is set. When an 8R specific jackpot symbol designation command is received, an 8R specific jackpot symbol designation flag indicating that the command has been received is set. When a 10R specific jackpot symbol designation command is received, a 10R specific jackpot symbol designation flag indicating that the command has been received is set. When a 12R specific jackpot symbol designation command is received, a 12R specific jackpot symbol designation flag indicating that the command has been received is set. When a 16R specific jackpot symbol designation command is received, a 16R specific jackpot symbol designation flag indicating that the command has been received is set. When a 15R probability variation big hit symbol designating command is received, 1 indicating that the command has been received
The 5R probability variation big hit symbol designation flag is set. When a 15R normal jackpot symbol designation command is received, a 15R normal jackpot symbol designation flag indicating that the command has been received is set.

  If it is determined in SP3 that it is not a symbol designation command, it is determined in SP5 whether or not the read received command is a variation pattern command. If it is determined in SP5 that the command is a variation pattern command, processing for setting a variation pattern designation flag, which is a flag that can specify the contents of the command, to an on state is performed in SP6 in response to the received variation pattern command. Return to SP1. That is, in SP6, a variation pattern designation flag is prepared corresponding to each of the selectable variation patterns, and the variation pattern designation flag for identifying the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern command is turned on. On the other hand, when it is determined in SP5 that it is not a variation pattern command, it is determined in SP7 whether or not the read received command is a big hit start command.

  When it is determined at SP7 that the command is a big hit start command, SP8 performs processing for setting the big hit start designation flag, which is a flag that can specify the contents of the command, to an ON state in response to the received big hit start command. Return to SP1. On the other hand, when it is determined in SP7 that it is not a big hit start command, it is determined in SP9 whether or not the read received command is a round start command.

  When it is determined at SP9 that the command is a round start command, SP10 performs processing for setting a round start designation flag as an on-state flag corresponding to the received round start command as a flag that can specify the content of the command. Return to SP1. That is, in SP10, a round start designation flag is prepared corresponding to each of the rounds that can be designated, and the round start flag that identifies the round designated by the round start command is turned on. On the other hand, when it is determined in SP9 that the command is not a round start command, SP11 determines whether or not the read received command is a first winning ball detection command.

  When it is determined at SP11 that the command is the first winning ball detection command, SP12 turns on the first winning ball detection command as a flag that can specify the content of the command in response to the received first winning ball detection command. Processing to set the state is performed, and the process returns to SP1. On the other hand, when it is determined in SP11 that it is not the first winning ball detection command, it is determined in SP13 whether or not the read received command is a round end command.

  When it is determined at SP13 that the command is a round end command, SP14 performs processing for setting a round end designation flag as an on-state flag corresponding to the received round end command as a flag that can specify the content of the command. Return to SP1. That is, in SP14, a round end designation flag is prepared corresponding to each of the rounds that can be designated, and the round end flag that specifies the round designated by the round end command is turned on. On the other hand, when it is determined at SP13 that the command is not a round end command, SP15 determines what command the received command is, and sets an effect designation flag, which is a flag that can specify the content of the received command, to an on state. And return to SP1. That is, the SP 15 collectively shows processes corresponding to reception of various commands other than the commands described above.

  Next, the display control process of SN6 in FIG. 28 will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing display control process processing. In the display control process process, one of SQ1 to SQ9 is executed according to the value of the display control process flag. In the display control process process, the following process is executed in each process of SQ1 to SQ9.

  In SQ1, command reception waiting processing is performed. In the command reception waiting process, based on the variation pattern designation flag, it is confirmed whether any variation pattern command is received from the variation pattern commands described above, and it is confirmed that the variation pattern command has been received. In some cases, a process of updating the value of the display control process flag to a value corresponding to the decorative symbol setting process of SQ2 is performed.

  In SQ2, a decorative symbol setting process is performed. In the decorative symbol setting process, the display result of the decorative symbol variable display is determined according to the received symbol designation command. More specifically, based on the set symbol designating flag, a variable display such as a combination of outlier symbols, a specific jackpot symbol combination (chance), a 15R probability variable jackpot symbol combination, or a 15R normal jackpot symbol combination, etc. The display result of the decorative pattern at is determined. These display results are randomly determined using the random counters RS1 to RS3 for determining the decorative symbol stop symbol as described above. In that case, when the combination of outlier symbols is determined, and the variation pattern for reaching is specified by the variation pattern command, as described above, the combination of outlier symbols to be reached is determined and the variation pattern is determined. When the variation pattern when the reach is not reached is specified by the command, the combination of the symbols that are not reach is determined.

  In SQ2, in accordance with the received variation pattern command, a variation pattern that is actually used for variation display on the variation display device 9 is selected from a plurality of variation patterns of ornament symbols that are predetermined as variation patterns of ornament symbols. It is determined. Further, a variation time is set according to the determined variation pattern, and the variation of the decorative symbols (left, middle, right symbol) in the variation display device 9 is started. Thereafter, a process of updating the value of the display control process flag to a value corresponding to the decorative symbol variation process of SQ3 is performed.

  In SQ3, a decorative symbol variation process is performed. In the decorative symbol variation process, the switching timing of each variation state (variation speed, etc.) constituting the variation pattern of the decorative symbol is controlled, and the end of the set variation time is monitored. As a result, the variation display of the decorative pattern is performed with the variation pattern determined by SQ2. Then, when the set variation time ends, the left, middle and right symbols of the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped, and control is performed so that the variation of the symbols is swaying without confirming the display result. Thereafter, a process of updating the value of the display control process flag to a value corresponding to the decorative symbol stop process of SQ4 is performed.

  In SQ4, a decorative symbol stop process is performed. In the decorative symbol stop process, when the variation time specified by the variation pattern command has elapsed and the symbol stop command for designating all symbols of the decorative symbol has been received, the decorative symbol variation display is stopped (the above-mentioned shaking Control is performed to stop the fluctuation state) and derive and display a stop symbol as a fluctuation display result. Thereafter, when the decorative symbol display result becomes the specific jackpot display result and is controlled to the specific jackpot gaming state, a process of updating the value of the display control process flag to a value corresponding to the first jackpot release pre-processing of SQ5 is performed. In addition, when the decorative symbol display result is the 15R probability variable jackpot display result or the 15R normal jackpot display result and is controlled to the 15R jackpot gaming state, the value of the display control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the second jackpot display process of SQ7. Processing is performed. Further, when the display result of the decorative symbol is a non-consecutive display result and is not controlled to the big hit gaming state, a process of updating the value of the display control process flag to a value corresponding to the command reception waiting process of SQ1 is performed.

In SQ5, the first big hit release pre-processing is performed. In the first big hit release pre-processing, processing that needs to be executed before the start of the round, such as a bonus start effect display before the start of the specific big hit game state and a bonus continuation effect display between rounds, is performed. Then, at the start of the round, a process of updating the value of the display control process flag to a value corresponding to the first big hit opening process of SQ6 is performed.

  In SQ6, the first big hit opening process is performed. In the first big hit opening process, a process that needs to be executed during the round, such as a winning number display and a bonus continuation effect display during the round, is performed. Then, at the end of the round before the last round, a process of updating the value of the display control process flag to a value corresponding to the first big hit release pre-processing of SQ5 is performed. As described above, in the specific big hit game state, the first big hit pre-release process and the first big hit big release process are repeatedly performed until the final round. Then, at the end of the final round, a process of updating the value of the display control process flag to a value corresponding to the command reception waiting process of SQ1 is performed. Thereby, the bonus effect in the specific big hit gaming state is completed.

  In SQ7, a second big hit display process is performed. In the second jackpot display process, a big hit start display of the process at the start of the 15R big hit gaming state is performed. Thereafter, a process of updating the value of the display control process flag to a value corresponding to the second big hit game process of SQ8 is performed.

  In SQ8, the second big hit game process is performed. In the second big hit game processing, a 15R big hit game effect display, which is a display for producing an effect in the 15R big hit game state, is performed. For example, as the 15R jackpot game effect display, various effects during each round and various effects during the interval period between the rounds are displayed to display decorated effects during the 15R jackpot game state. . Then, when the 15R big hit game effect display ends, a process of updating the value of the display control process flag to a value corresponding to the second big hit game end process of SQ9 is performed.

  In SQ9, a second big hit game ending process is performed. In the second jackpot game end process, an ending display is performed as an effect when the 15R jackpot game state is ended. At the end of the ending display, a process of updating the value of the display control process flag to a value corresponding to the command reception waiting process of SQ1 is performed. Thereby, the display for producing the 15R big hit gaming state is completed.

  Next, display control when a specific big hit is achieved will be described in detail. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the first winning ball counting process. The first winning ball counting process is a process that is called and executed in each of the first big hit pre-release process of SQ5 and the first big hit release process of SQ6. This is a process for updating various counters for counting winning balls and updating the display of the number of winning prizes.

First, at step SS (hereinafter simply referred to as SS) 1, it is determined whether or not the first winning ball detection flag set by SP12 is set to the ON state. If it is determined by SS1 that the first winning ball detection flag is not on, the process returns. On the other hand, when it is determined by SS1 that the first winning ball detection flag is in the ON state, the value of the cumulative winning number counter for counting the cumulative winning number is incremented by "1" and updated by SS2. Also, by SS3, the value of the individual period counter for counting the number of winnings for the individual period described above is updated by subtracting “1”. As for the value of the counter during the individual period, “0” is a lower limit value, and subtraction is not updated to a value smaller than “0”. Also, by SS4, the value of the in-round counter for counting the number of winning balls in one round is updated by adding “1”. Then, the first winning ball detection flag is reset to the off state by SS5. Next, based on the respective values of the cumulative winning number counter and the individual period counter updated by SS6, for example, as shown in (L) of FIG. 15, winning number display (accumulated winning number display, individual period) Winning number display) is updated and the process returns.

  FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a subroutine program of the first big hit release pre-processing of SQ5. In the first big hit pre-release process, first, the first winning ball counting process described above is performed in step SR (hereinafter simply referred to as SR) 1. Next, SR2 determines whether or not the above-described round start designation flag is set to the on state in response to the start of the round. When it is determined by SR2 that the round start designation flag is not in the ON state, the process proceeds to SR21 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined by SR2 that the round start designation flag is in the ON state, each round in the specific big hit gaming state is started. At this time, the process of resetting the round start designation flag determined in SR2 to the OFF state is performed by SR3.

  Next, the value of the round number counter that counts the number of rounds to update the current round in the specific jackpot gaming state is updated by “1” by SR4. The round number counter has an initial value of “0” and is set to “1” when the first round is started. Thereafter, the round number counter is incremented and updated by “1” every time a round start command is received. Thus, it is possible to specify the number of rounds.

  Next, from the time SR5 indicates that the first round is started by the round start command to the time when the opening / closing piece 81 is actually opened and the first round control operation (opening operation) is started. In addition, since the opening / closing piece 81 is finally closed in the previous round and the round is ended, the opening / closing piece 81 is actually opened in the next round and the control operation of the next round ( A value corresponding to the closing time shown in FIG. 4A is set in the opening waiting timer as the opening waiting time which is also a period until the opening operation) is started. Here, the progress of the round in the specific big hit gaming state will be described. In the specific jackpot gaming state, the control period of each round starts from a closed state with a closing time lasting 800 ms as described above. Then, when the 800 ms closing time has elapsed, the control operation (opening operation) of each round is started. The one round control period ends when the first special variable winning ball device 66 repeats a maximum of 18 times to enter the closed state and the open state, and then ends when the final open state ends and becomes the closed state. At that time, one round of control operation ends. For the control action of each round, there is no long interval period that can easily distinguish between rounds, and when the round is closed at the end of the round, the control period of the next round (first closing time) Will be started. Therefore, the round in this embodiment is set as a closing time of 800 ms from the start of the round control period to the start of the round control operation (the driving pattern for opening and closing the solenoid 105 for the open / close piece). A period of 800 ms is determined as an actual round break, and a closed period before the start of the control operation of the round is treated as a period between rounds (a period between round control operations).

  Then, in order to determine whether or not it is the first round by SR6, it is determined whether or not the value of the above-mentioned round number counter is “1”. When it is determined by SR6 that the value of the round number counter is not “1”, the process proceeds to SR12 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the round number counter is “1”, the value of RS4 is extracted in SR7, and the bonus continuation pattern is randomly selected based on the value by the selection method as described above. The Then, by SR8, the bonus number counter is updated by adding “1”. The bonus number counter is, for example, a counter that is incremented and updated by “1” every time the specific big hit gaming state is started in order to display the bonus consecutive number of times as shown in FIG. Is “0”, and when it becomes 15R probability variation big hit or 15R normal big hit, it is reset to the initial value.

  Next, the data required for the future bonus effect such as the expected number of winnings for the first individual period and the initial value of the counter during the individual period will be selected as the selected bonus by SR9. It is set based on referring to the expected number of winnings in the individual period specified by the continuation pattern. Then, SR10 starts a bonus start effect display including an expected winning number display and a winning number display, and returns. Then, in order to specify how many individual periods the individual period in the specific big hit gaming state is, the value of the period number counter for counting the individual period to be executed is updated by “1”. The period counter has an initial value of “0” and is set to “1” when the first individual period is started, and thereafter is incremented and updated by “1” every time the individual period is started. .

  When the above-mentioned SR6 determines that the value of the round number counter is not “1”, the round from which the control operation is started is the second and subsequent rounds. At that time, it is determined according to the current control state whether or not the continuous notification is to be executed between the rounds until the start of the control operation of the round in which the control operation is started by the steps after SR12. When it is necessary to execute continuous notification between the two times, control is performed to execute continuous notification between rounds.

  In SR12, it is determined whether or not the round from which the control operation is started is the first round (first round) of the individual period. Specifically, in SR12, whether or not the round specified by the round number counter (the round from which control operation will be started) matches the first round of the individual period specified by the bonus continuation pattern selected by SR7. Based on the confirmation, the above-described determination is made. The ROM 901 of the effect control microcomputer 900 stores data for specifying the first round of each individual period in the bonus continuation pattern corresponding to each of the bonus continuation pattern data as shown in FIGS. The data is read corresponding to the selected continuation pattern and used for the determination in SR12.

  When it is determined by SR12 that the round from which control operation will be started is not the first round of the individual period, there is no need for continuous notification between rounds, and the routine returns. On the other hand, when it is determined by SR12 that it is the first round of the individual period, it is determined by SR13 whether or not the round from which control operation will be started is the midway notification setting round. Here, the midway notification setting round is a continuous notification in the middle of the round by selecting a value (for example, 22) that does not become a multiple of the prescribed number of winnings for one round as the expected number of winnings to be notified for the individual period. Is a round that is set in advance. Specifically, in SR13, in the bonus continuation pattern data selected in SR7, is the expected winning number corresponding to the number of rounds specified by the round number counter a value that is not a multiple of the prescribed winning number for one round? By determining whether or not, it is determined whether or not it is a midway notification setting round.

When it is determined by SR13 that the round from which control operation is to be started is the midway notification setting round, continuous notification is basically performed in the middle of the round from which control operation is to be started, and continuous notification is performed between rounds. When you don't have to. At that time, a value corresponding to a predetermined time is set in the midway notification determination timer, which is a timer for managing the basic continuation timing of the individual period ending in the middle of the round in which the control operation is started, by SR14. Set to The value set in the midway notification determination timer is the individual set in the midway notification setting round when the individual period ends when the number of wins in each round in the individual period is not excessive or insufficient with respect to the prescribed number of winnings (10). Number of game balls satisfying the expected number of winning balls for the period (for example, when the expected number of winning balls for the individual period is 22, the number satisfying the expected winning number in the third round, which is the midway notification setting round, is 2) Is enough time to win. Therefore, as the value set in the midway notification determination timer, a predetermined value is selected and used for each expected number of winning balls in an individual period in which a value that is not a multiple of the prescribed number of winnings is determined as the expected number of winnings.

  On the other hand, when it is determined by SR13 that the round from which control operation is to be started is not the midway notification setting round, SR15 reaches the expected number of winnings during the round other than the midway notification setting round. It is determined whether or not a midway notification flag, which is a flag set in the first big hit opening process, is set to the on state. When the midway notification flag is set to the on state, the continuous notification is performed during the round in which the midway notification flag is turned on in order to perform the round midway continuation control as described above. When you don't have to. If it is determined by SR15 that the midway notification flag is on, the midway continuation flag is reset to off by SR20 and the process returns. Thus, when the mid-round continuation control is performed, continuation notification between rounds is not performed.

  Further, when it is determined by SR15 that the midway notification flag is in an off state, SR16 is set when the individual period winning number is insufficient with respect to the expected winning number at the end of the final round in the individual period. It is determined whether or not a delay notification flag, which is a flag, is set to an on state. When the delay notification flag is set to the on state, the notification is performed in the next round in which the delay notification flag is turned on in order to perform the above-described continuous delay control. When there is no need. If SR16 determines that the delay notification flag is on, the process returns. Thus, when continuous delay control is performed, continuous notification between rounds is not performed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined by SR16 that the delay notification flag is in the off state, SR16 satisfies the condition for continuous notification between rounds. At that time, the data required for the bonus effect such as the expected number of winnings for the next individual period, the initial value of the counter during the individual period, and the like for the individual period is specified by SR17 in the individual period specified by the selected bonus continuation pattern. It is set based on referring to the expected number of winnings. Then, the bonus start effect display including the expected winning number display and the winning number display is started by SR18. Thereby, continuous notification is performed between rounds. Then, the value of the period number counter is updated by adding “1”, and the process returns. In SR18, the selected bonus continuation pattern is displayed from the second notification, and each time the SR19 period number counter is added, the expected number of winnings for the third notification, the fourth notification, etc. is displayed. .

When it is determined by SR2 that the round start designation flag is not in the ON state, it is determined at SR21 whether or not the above-mentioned release waiting timer is set. If it is determined in SR21 that the release wait timer is not set, the process returns. On the other hand, when it is determined in SR21 that the release waiting timer is set, the value of the release waiting timer set as described above is updated by subtracting "1". As a result, the release waiting timer set in SR5 is counted down each time SR22 is executed. Then, SR23 determines whether or not the timer for waiting for release after subtraction has timed up (the timer value has become 0). If it is determined by SR23 that the time is not up, the process returns. On the other hand, when it is determined by SR23 that the time is up, SR24 resets the release wait timer. Then, the process of updating the value of the display control process flag to a value corresponding to the first big hit release process of SQ6 is performed by SR25. As a result, the process for producing the round in which the control operation is to be started is started in accordance with the timing of starting the control operation in which the opening / closing piece 81 is actually opened. In this way, by waiting for the opening waiting timer to shift to the first big hit opening process until the round control operation is started, the execution start timing of the effect in the first big hit opening process is actually set. It is possible to synchronize with the timing at which the round control operation in which the opening / closing piece 81 is opened is started. Thus, the opening waiting timer is necessary to synchronize the effect control with the round control operation in which the opening / closing piece 81 is actually opened.

  FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing a subroutine program of the first big hit opening process of SQ6. In the first big hit opening process, first, it is determined in step SV (hereinafter simply referred to as SV) 1 whether or not the starting round is the first round of the individual period. Specifically, in SV1, based on checking whether or not the current round specified by the round number counter matches the first round of the individual period specified by the bonus continuation pattern selected by SR7, The above determination is made.

  When it is determined by SV1 that the current round is not the first round of the individual period, normal round processing is performed by SV2, and the process returns. The normal round process is a process of performing display control during a round for rounds other than the midway notification setting round. On the other hand, when it is determined by SV1 that the current round is the first round of the individual period, it is determined by SV3 whether or not the current round is a midway notification setting round.

  When it is determined by SV3 that it is not a midway notification setting round, normal round processing is performed by SV2. On the other hand, when it is determined by SV3 that it is a midway notification setting round, the value of the midway notification determination timer set as described above is subtracted and updated by SV4. As a result, when the midway notification determination timer is set in SR14, the midway notification determination timer is counted down every time SV4 is executed. Then, the SV5 performs a midway continuation round process and returns. The midway continuation round process is a process of performing display control during a round for a midway notification setting round.

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing a subroutine program of normal round processing by SV2. In the normal round process, first, the aforementioned first winning ball counting process is performed in step ST (hereinafter simply referred to as ST) 1. Next, whether or not it is the end of the round is determined based on determining whether or not the above-described round end designation flag is set to the ON state in ST2. When it is determined by ST2 that the round is over, the process proceeds to ST19 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined by ST2 that it is not at the end of the round, it is in the middle of the round. At that time, in ST3, it is determined whether or not the individual period processed flag is set to ON. The individual period processed flag is a flag that is set to the on state when the processing for performing the bonus continuous effect display is completed in the current round. The following two cases can be considered as cases where the individual period processed flag is set. In the first case, during the current individual period, the number of game balls won in the round before the current round exceeded the prescribed number of wins for one round (the number of game balls in the round) Individually based on the fact that the bonus continuation effect display was performed in the current round by continuous control in the middle of the round when the number of winnings in the individual period has reached the expected number of winnings) This is a case where the period processed flag is set. The second case is initially set as a round belonging to an individual period because the number of game balls won in one round is less than the prescribed number of prizes for one round in the individual period one year before the present. A case in which the individual period processed flag is set because the bonus continuation effect display was performed in the current round by continuous delay control due to the fact that the number of individual period winnings at the end of the round was insufficient with respect to the expected number of winnings It is.

If it is determined in ST3 that the individual period processed flag is in the on state, there is no need to perform a process related to the bonus continuation effect display, and the process returns. On the other hand, when it is determined in ST3 that the individual period processed flag is not in the ON state, it is determined in ST4 whether or not the value of the above-described individual period counter is “0”. When it is determined by ST4 that it is not “0”, the process returns. On the other hand, when it is determined by ST4 that it is “0”, the individual period winnings in the individual period to which the round belongs already reaches the expected number of winnings in the individual period before the round ends. When As described above, there are the first case and the second case described above as the cases where the number of individual period winnings has already reached the expected number of winnings in the individual period to which the round belongs, at the time before the round ends. Therefore, when it is determined that the value is “0” in ST4, the delay notification flag is turned on in ST6 in order to perform processing by dividing the case into the first case and the second case. It is determined whether it is set.

  When it is determined in ST6 that the delay notification flag is in the ON state, this is the case of the second case described above, and the process proceeds to ST7 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined by ST6 that the delay notification flag is in the off state, it is the case of the first case described above. It is determined whether or not the prescribed number of winnings has been reached. ST8 is the first winning ball as shown in SE3 of FIG. 22 and SK4 of FIG. 27 even when the individual period winning number of the individual period to which the round belongs reaches the expected winning number when the round ends. Since the detection command is transmitted before the round end command, such a case is performed in order to exclude such a case from the target of midway continuation control.

  When it is determined in ST8 that the number of winnings in the round has reached the prescribed number of winnings in one round, the process returns. If it is determined in ST8 that the number of winnings in the round has not reached the prescribed number of winnings in one round, it is determined in ST9 whether the current round belongs to the final individual period in the specific jackpot gaming state. Is done. If it is determined in ST9 that it belongs to the final individual period, there is no next individual period, and there is no need to perform a bonus continuous effect display, so the process returns. On the other hand, if it is determined by ST9 that it does not belong to the final individual period, ST10 is an excess that is the number of winnings that exceeds the specified number of winnings in the round prior to that round in the individual period to which the current round belongs. Processing for calculating the number of winnings is performed. Specifically, in ST10, the number of excess winnings is calculated by subtracting the value of the current round counter from the prescribed number of winnings in one round (in this case, the expected number of winnings in the individual period is the prescribed winning number) Since the number is a multiple of the number, the remaining number of the prescribed winning numbers in the round in which the number of winnings in the individual period has reached the expected number of winnings is the same value as the number of excess winnings). In other words, when the display of the number of winnings for the individual period is counted down to “0”, the winning number that is not enough for the prescribed number of winnings in the round is the number of winnings in excess of the previous round.

  Then, in ST11, a process of adding the excess winning number calculated in ST10 to the expected winning number determined in advance for the next individual period is performed. In other words, since the timing for displaying the bonus continuation effect is earlier than planned, the number of winnings determined in the earlier period is added to the expected number of winnings in the next individual period, so that the expected number of winnings in the next individual period The number of game balls that can be actually won is matched. Then, in ST12, the above-described midway notification flag is set to the on state.

Next, in ST15, the data required for the bonus effect such as the expected number of winnings for the next individual period, the initial value of the counter during the individual period, and the like for the individual period specified by the selected bonus continuation pattern. It is set based on referring to the expected number of winnings. Next, in ST16, a bonus start effect display including a winning expected number display and a winning number display is started. Thereby, continuation alerting | reporting is performed in the middle of a round. When such processes of ST15 and ST16 are performed, when the excess winning number is added to the expected winning number in ST12, the expected winning number added in ST11 in ST15 and ST16 is the following. It is used as an initial value of an individual period counter as an expected number of winnings in an individual period and an initial value of the winning number of individual periods. Thereby, in the bonus continuation effect display, the added expected number of winnings as shown in (U5) of FIG. 17 is displayed. In ST17, the value of the period counter is updated by adding “1”. Next, in ST18, the individual period processed flag is set to the on state, and the process returns.

  The display in ST16 is executed regardless of whether the opening / closing piece 81 is in the open state or the closed state, but it is executed after waiting for the opening / closing piece 81 to be in the closed state. Also good. Specifically, for example, each time the opening / closing piece 81 is opened and closed, a control signal (which may be an effect control command or may be a control signal other than the command) is input to the effect control microcomputer 800. The display by ST16 may be executed when it is determined that the open / close piece 81 is in a closed state based on the control signal. Further, for example, the time from the start of the round control period is counted, and the time measured based on the drive pattern (see FIG. 4) of the open / close piece 81 from the start of the round control period is measured. The display in ST16 may be executed when it is determined that the timing for closing is reached. As described above, when the display by ST16 is executed after the opening / closing piece 81 is closed, the timing at which the specific big hit gaming state continues is matched with the timing at which the opening / closing piece 81 is closed. Therefore, it is possible to make the continuous notification easy for the player to recognize, and to make it easy for the player to grasp the continued timing.

  When it is determined in ST6 that the delay notification flag is in the ON state, this is the case of the second case described above. In ST7, the delay notification flag is set in the OFF state, and the processes in ST15 to ST18 described above are performed. It is. Thus, when it is determined in ST6 that the delay notification flag is on, continuous notification is performed in the middle of the round when the value of the counter during the individual period becomes “0”. When it is determined in ST6 that the delay notification flag is in the ON state and the processing of ST15 to ST18 is performed, the expected number of winnings subtracted in ST26 of the previous round is the winning expectation for the next individual period. It is used as the initial value of the counter during the individual period as the initial value of the number and the number of winnings in the individual period. Thereby, in the bonus continuation effect display, the expected number of winnings subtracted as shown in (V5) of FIG. 18 is displayed.

  If it is determined at ST2 that the round is ended, the value of the in-round counter is initialized to “0” at ST19. In ST20, flags unnecessary for future control such as a delay notification flag and an individual period processed flag are initialized. Next, in ST21, it is determined whether or not the round determined at the end of the round in ST2 is the final round in the entire period in the specific jackpot gaming state. When it is determined by ST21 that it is the final round in the entire period, the process proceeds to ST29 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined by ST21 that it is not the final round in the entire period, the process for determining whether or not to continue delay control is performed by ST22 to ST27 before the process of proceeding to the next round. It is.

In ST22, it is determined whether or not it is the end round of the individual period (the round executed last among the rounds belonging to the individual period). If it is determined by ST22 that it is not the end round of the individual period, it is a round that is not subject to continuous delay control, and so the process proceeds to ST28. On the other hand, when it is determined in ST22 that the round is the end of the individual period, it is determined in ST23 whether or not the above-described midway notification flag is set to the on state. If it is determined in ST23 that the midway notification flag is set to the on state, the number of winnings in the individual period is not insufficient with respect to the expected number of winnings in the individual period, so ST2
Proceed to step 8. On the other hand, when it is determined by ST23 that the midway notification flag is not set to the ON state, it is determined by ST24 whether or not the value of the individual period counter is larger than “0”.

  When it is determined by ST24 that the value of the counter during the individual period is not larger than “0” (when “0”), at the end of the individual period to which the round determined to be the end time by ST2 belongs. Since the number of winnings in the individual period is not short of the expected number of winnings, the process returns. On the other hand, when it is determined by ST24 that the value of the counter during the individual period is greater than “0”, at the end of the individual period to which the round determined to be the end time by ST2 belongs, Since the number of winnings for the individual period is insufficient with respect to the expected number of winnings, a process for calculating the number of winnings by calculation is performed in ST25. Specifically, in ST25, the insufficient winning number is calculated by performing an operation of subtracting the value of the individual period counter from the expected winning number in the individual period. In other words, when the end round of the individual period ends, the number of winnings that is not enough for the expected number of winnings in the individual period is the shortage of winnings.

  Then, in ST26, a process of subtracting the insufficient winning number calculated in ST25 from the expected winning number predetermined for the next individual period is performed. In other words, the timing for displaying the bonus continuation effect is delayed from the originally scheduled round until the number of winnings equal to the number of shortage winnings is obtained, and delayed until the next scheduled round of the individual period. Therefore, by reducing the number of winnings corresponding to the shortage winning number from the expected number of winnings initially planned for the next individual period, the expected number of winnings in the next individual period and the number of game balls that can actually be won Are aligned. Then, in ST27, the above-mentioned continuation continuation flag is set to the on state, and the process proceeds to ST28.

  In ST28, a process of updating the value of the display control process flag to a value corresponding to the first big hit release pre-processing of SQ5 is performed. As a result, processing corresponding to the next round is performed.

  Further, when it is determined by ST21 that the final round is in the entire period, the data of the counters unnecessary for the future control such as the individual period counter, the round number counter, and the period number counter is obtained by ST29. It is initialized. Next, a bonus end effect display is started in ST30. Then, in ST31, a process of updating the value of the display control process flag to a value corresponding to the SQ1 command reception waiting process is performed.

  FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing a subroutine program of the midway continuation round process by SV5. In the midway notification setting round, unlike the other rounds, it is predetermined that the bonus continuation effect display is performed in the middle of the round. Therefore, in the halfway continuation round processing, the round continuation control and the continuation delay control for determining whether or not to perform control using the end time of the round in the normal round processing as the reference timing for the end of the individual period, It is determined whether or not to perform control using the intermediate timing as the reference timing for the end of the individual period.

  In the midway continuation round process, first, the first winning ball counting process described above is performed in step SU (hereinafter simply referred to as SU) 1. Next, based on determining whether or not the above-described round end designation flag is set in the ON state, it is determined whether or not the round is ended.

When it is determined by SU2 that the round is over, the process proceeds to SU25 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined by ST2 that it is not at the end of the round, it is in the middle of the round. At that time, it is determined by SU3 whether or not the midway notification elapsed flag is set to the ON state. The halfway notification time elapse flag is set to the ON state when the midway notification determination timer set by SR14 times out in the current round and the continuation timing of the individual period that ends in the middle of the round has elapsed. Flag.

  When it is determined by SU3 that the midway notification time elapse flag is on, the process proceeds to SU19 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined by SU3 that the midway notification time elapse flag is not in the ON state, it is determined by SU4 whether or not the above-described midway notification determination timer has expired (the timer value has become 0). The When it is determined by SU4 that the time is up, the individual period has ended, and the process proceeds to SU5 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined by SU4 that the time is not up, the process proceeds to SU10, where it is determined whether or not the value of the above-described individual period counter is “0”. If the SU10 determines that it is not “0”, it returns.

  On the other hand, when it is determined by SU10 that it is “0”, the individual period in the individual period in which the continuation timing is already set at the time before the continuation timing in the originally scheduled round This is when the number of winnings reaches the expected number of winnings for the individual period. At that time, the SU 11 performs a process of calculating by calculation the excess number of winnings, which is the number of winnings exceeding the prescribed number of winnings in the round prior to the current round in the individual period to which the current round belongs. Specifically, the SU 11 calculates the excess number of winnings by performing an operation of subtracting the value of the current round counter from the prescribed number of winnings up to the time when the continuation timing is reached in the round. In other words, when the display of the number of winnings for the individual period is counted down to “0”, the number of winnings that are not enough for the stipulated winnings until the continuation timing is excessively won in the previous round. The number of winnings. For example, when the expected number of winnings in the individual period is “22”, the prescribed number of winnings up to the time when the above-mentioned continuation timing is reached in the third round that is the end round of the individual period is “2”. It is a piece. For example, when the value of the game ball in the individual period reaches the expected number of winnings in the individual period when the value of the counter during the round becomes “1” in the round, the predetermined number of winnings (“2 )) Is subtracted from the current round counter value (“1”) in this case, the excess winning number (“1”) is calculated.

  Then, the SU 12 performs a process of adding the excess winning number calculated in ST11 to the expected winning number determined in advance for the next individual period. Then, in SU13, the midway notification flag is set to the on state as in ST12 described above. In SU15, data necessary for the bonus effect for the next individual period is selected as in ST15 described above. Next, at SU16, a bonus start effect display is started as in ST16 described above. Then, in SU17, as in ST17, the value of the period counter is updated by adding “1”, and the process returns. In this way, when the processing of SU15 to SU17 is performed when the excess winning number is added to the expected winning number by SU12, the expected number of winnings in the next individual period and the number of winnings in the individual period in SU15 and SU16. As an initial value of the counter during the individual period. Thereby, in the bonus continuation effect display, the added expected number of winnings as shown in (U5) of FIG. 17 is displayed.

  In this way, when the individual period winnings in the individual period for which the continuation timing has already been set reaches the expected number of winnings in the individual period at a time before it is determined that the continuation timing is in the middle of the round, Control similar to the mid-round continuation control performed in the round process is performed.

When it is determined by SU4 that the midway notification determination timer has expired, the above-described midway notification time elapse flag is set to ON by SU5. This indicates that the continuation timing during the round has elapsed. Then, in SU6, it is determined whether or not the value of the individual period counter is larger than “0” as in ST24 described above.

  When it is determined by SU6 that the value of the counter during the individual period is not greater than “0”, the individual period winning number in the individual period at the end of the individual period determined by SU4 as the continuation timing is There is no shortage of the expected number of winnings. At that time, it is determined by the SU 6a whether or not the above-described midway notification flag is set to the on state.

  When it is determined by the SU 6a that the midway notification flag is not in the on state, the number of winnings in the individual period is not excessive or insufficient with respect to the prescribed number of winnings in the round, and the processing of SU15 to SU17 described above is performed. Bonus continuation effect display is performed. On the other hand, when it is determined by the SU 6a that the midway notification flag is in the on state, since the midway round continuation control has already been performed at a time before the continuation timing during the round, the bonus continuation effect display is displayed. A process for resetting the midway notification flag to the off state is performed, and the process returns.

  On the other hand, when the value of the counter during the individual period is determined to be greater than “0” by SU6, at the end of the individual period determined as the continuation timing by SU4, the number of winnings in the individual period is Since there is a shortage with respect to the expected number of winnings, SU7 performs a process of calculating the number of insufficient winnings by calculation, as in ST25. In other words, when the continuation timing is reached, the number of winnings that are not enough for the expected number of winnings in the individual period is the number of winnings that are insufficient.

  Then, in the same manner as ST26, the process of subtracting the number of insufficient winnings calculated by SU7 from the expected winning number predetermined for the next individual period is performed by SU8. In other words, the timing for performing the bonus continuous effect display is delayed from the originally scheduled timing until the number of winnings corresponding to the insufficient number of winnings is obtained, and the timing belonging to the individual period following the originally scheduled individual period Therefore, by reducing the number of winnings corresponding to the shortage of winnings from the expected number of winnings initially planned for the next individual period, the expected number of winnings in the next individual period and the number of game balls that can actually win The number is matched. Then, the continuation continuation flag described above is set to the ON state by SU9, and the process returns. Thus, when the individual period winning number in the individual period is insufficient with respect to the expected number of winnings at the end of the individual period determined to be the continuation timing in the middle of the round, the continuation performed in the normal round process The same control as the delay control is performed.

  Further, when the above-mentioned SU3 determines that the midway notification elapsed flag is on, the continuation timing in the middle of the round has elapsed, so that the bonus continuation effect display is expected to be a prize at the continuation timing in the middle of the round. Only when the delay notification flag is turned on due to a lack of the number of winnings for the individual period with respect to the number, the bonus continuous effect display by the continuous delay control is performed. When it is determined by SU3 that the midway notification elapsed flag is in the on state, it is determined by SU19 whether or not the individual period processed flag is set in the on state. In this case, the individual period processed flag is turned on by SU22, which will be described later, when the processing for performing the bonus continuous effect display by the continuous delay control is completed after the continuation timing in the middle of the round has elapsed in the current round. Flag set to

If it is determined by the SU 19 that the individual period processed flag is in the on state, there is no need to perform a process related to the bonus continuation effect display, and the process returns. On the other hand, when it is determined by the SU 19 that the individual period processed flag is not on, the SU 20 determines whether or not the value of the individual period counter is “0”. If it is determined by SU20 that it is not “0”, the process returns. On the other hand, when it is determined by SU20 that it is “0”, the bonus continuation effect display is performed at the continuation timing due to the shortage of the individual period winnings with respect to the expected number of winnings at the originally scheduled continuation timing in the middle of the round. Instead, it is conceivable that the number of winnings in the individual period reaches the expected number of winnings in the individual period after the continuation timing has elapsed. At that time, in order to confirm whether or not it is actually necessary to perform continuous delay control, it is determined by the SU 21 whether or not the delay notification flag is set to the on state.

  When SU21 determines that the delay notification flag is not set to the on state, the process returns. On the other hand, when it is determined by the SU 21 that the delay notification flag is set to the on state, the processing for resetting the delay notification flag to the off state is performed by the SU 22. Then, after the above-described individual period processed flag is set to the ON state by SU23, the above-described processing of SU15 to SU17 is performed, whereby the bonus continuous effect display is started. In this way, when the delay notification flag is determined to be in the ON state by SU21 and the processing of SU15 to ST17 is performed, the winnings subtracted by SU8 as the expected winning numbers for the next individual period in SU15 and SU16. The expected number is used as an initial value of a counter during an individual period as an expected number of winnings in the next individual period and an initial value of the individual period winnings number. Thereby, in the bonus continuation effect display, the expected number of winnings subtracted as shown in (V5) of FIG. 18 is displayed.

  As described above, when the number of winnings in the individual period is insufficient with respect to the expected number of winnings at the end of the individual period determined to be the continuation timing during the round, the normal round process is performed after the continuation timing. The same control as the continuation delay control performed in (1) is performed.

  If it is determined by SU2 that the round is ended, processing similar to ST19 and ST20 in FIG. 34 is performed by SU25 and SU26. Then, the process of updating the value of the display control process flag to a value corresponding to the first big hit pre-opening process of SQ5 is performed by SU27. As a result, processing corresponding to the next round is performed. Since the halfway continuation round process is performed for the first round of the individual period, if it is determined by SU2 that the round ends, the display control process must be performed to proceed to the next round in the individual period. Processing to update the value of the flag to a value corresponding to the first big hit release pre-processing of SQ5 is performed.

[Second Embodiment]
Next, a second embodiment will be described. In the second embodiment, in the specific jackpot gaming state, when the number of winnings in a certain round exceeds the prescribed number of winnings for one round, the number of winnings is the expected number of winnings in the middle of the subsequent round to which the round belongs. Instead of the above-mentioned mid-round continuation control, a notification that the specific big hit gaming state is continued at that time is continued and the notification is continued (extended) until the end of the round. Further, an example of performing control (hereinafter referred to as notification extension control) for prohibiting counting of the number of individual period winnings by the individual period counter will be described. In the second embodiment, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be mainly described.

FIG. 36 is a timing chart showing the control timing of the notification extension control. In FIG. 36, as in FIG. 12, the relationship between the actual round and the display on the screen of the effect display device 44b is shown as time elapses. 36, the description common to FIG. 12 described above will not be repeated.

  In FIG. 36, when the same bonus continuation pattern as in FIG. 12 is selected, the first individual period is determined because the number of winnings in the first round is twelve and the prescribed number of winnings in one round is exceeded. An example of control when the number of winnings reaches the expected number of winnings in the middle of the second round is shown.

  When the number of winnings in the first round reaches, for example, 12 and the number of winnings in the individual period reaches the expected number of winnings in the middle of the second round during the first individual period due to exceeding the prescribed number of winnings in the round, As shown in the figure, a bonus continuation effect display (“next continuation confirmation” in the figure) for performing continuous notification for the next individual period at the timing when the number of winnings in the individual period reaches the expected number of winnings is displayed. Control to start is performed. In the bonus continuation effect display, the expected winning number display and the winning number display are not performed for either the first individual period or the second individual period. Such a bonus continuation effect display is continuously performed until the round in which the number of winnings in the individual period reaches the expected winning number ends. Further, while such a bonus continuation effect display is being performed, counting of the number of individual winnings by the individual period counter is prohibited.

  In addition, during the round immediately after the end of the round, in addition to the continuous notification for the next second individual period, a display of the expected number of winnings for the second individual period ("+20" in the figure), and Control is performed to start a new bonus continuation effect display ("Continue" in the figure) for displaying the number of individual period winnings for the second individual period ("20.19 ..." in the figure).

  Next, the display of the bonus effect when the notification extension control is performed due to excess of the number of winnings in the specific big hit gaming state will be described. FIG. 37 is a display screen diagram showing a bonus effect display when the notification extension control is performed in the specific big hit gaming state. In FIG. 37, the state of the display screen of the effect display device 44b is shown as time passes in (W1) to (W11). With respect to FIG. 37, the description common to FIG. 17 described above will not be repeated.

  FIG. 37 shows the state of the display screen of the effect display device 44b in the control example shown in FIG. 36 over time for the specific jackpot gaming state in which the number of rounds is determined to be 8 rounds.

  As shown in (W1), after the first round is started and the display corresponding to the first round is started, as shown in (W2), the number of winnings in the first round is 12 and 1 The specified number of rounds was exceeded. Then, the second round is started as shown in (W2), and the number of winning prizes is counted as shown in (W3). Thereafter, as shown in (W4), in the middle of the second round during the first individual period, the number of individual period winnings reached the expected number of winnings. As a result, as shown in (W5), at the timing when the number of winnings in the individual period reaches the expected number of winnings, a bonus for performing continuous notification for the second individual period (third and fourth rounds) as shown in (W5). Control for starting the continuous effect display (“next continuation confirmation” in the figure) is performed. When the bonus continuous effect display is performed, the expected winning number display and the winning number display are not performed. Such a bonus continuation effect display is continuously performed by the notification extension control until the round in which the number of winnings in the individual period reaches the expected winning number ends.

As shown in (W6), when the winning condition of the round in which the winning ball is won in the first special variable winning ball device 66 and the individual period winning number reaches the expected winning number is satisfied, the second round is ended. Then, between the second round and the third round, the next individual period (
Control for starting a bonus continuation effect display (“continuation” in the figure) for performing continuation notification for the third and fourth rounds is performed. When the second bonus continuation effect display is started, as shown in (W7), an expected winning number display and a winning number display are performed.

  Next, display control when a specific big hit is achieved in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment will be described in detail. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the first winning ball counting process according to the second embodiment. The first winning ball counting process in FIG. 38 is a process that can be replaced with that in FIG. 38 will be described mainly with respect to the differences from FIG.

  The first winning ball counting process of FIG. 38 is different from the process of FIG. 31 in that SS2a is provided between SS2 and SS3, and SS6a is provided between SS5 and SS6. It is.

  In SS2a, it is determined whether or not the notification extension flag is set to the on state. Here, the notification extension flag indicates that when the condition for performing the notification extension control is satisfied, that is, when the number of winnings in a certain round exceeds the prescribed number of winnings in one round, The ON state is set when the number of winnings in the individual period reaches the expected number of winnings on the way. When it is determined by SS2a that the notification extension flag is not in the ON state, the individual period counter is updated by SS3 as in the case of FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined by SS2a that the notification extension flag is on, the process proceeds to SS4 without updating the individual period counter by SS3. Thereby, when the notification extension flag is on by SS2a, updating of the counter during the individual period is prohibited.

  In SS5a, it is determined whether or not the notification extension flag is set to the on state. When it is determined by SS5a that the notification extension flag is not in the on state, the winning number display is updated by SS6 as in the case of FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined by SS5a that the notification extension flag is in the on state, the winning number display is not updated by SS6 and the process returns. This is because when the notification extension flag is set to the on state, the number of winnings is not displayed, and therefore it is not necessary to execute SS6.

  FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the first big hit release pre-processing according to the second embodiment. The first big hit pre-opening process in FIG. 39 is a process that can replace the process in FIG. 39 will be described mainly with respect to the differences from FIG.

  The first big hit release pre-processing in FIG. 39 is different from the processing in FIG. 32 in the case of the second embodiment, since the mid-round continuation control is not performed, SR15 and SR20 in FIG. It is not provided. As a result, whether or not the delay notification flag is set to the on state by SR16 without going through the determination of SR15 when it is determined by SR13 that the round from which control operation is to be started is not the midway notification setting round. Will be judged.

  FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing normal round processing according to the second embodiment. The normal round process in FIG. 40 is a process that can replace the process in FIG. 40 will be described mainly with respect to the differences from FIG.

  The normal round process of FIG. 40 is different from the process of FIG. 34 in that ST10 to ST12 of FIG. 34 relating to the mid-round continuation control is not provided, and ST10a and ST10b relating to the notification extension control are provided instead. It is that.

Referring to FIG. 40, when it is determined by ST9 that it does not belong to the final individual period, ST
10a sets the above-described notification extension flag to the on state. As described above, when the notification extension flag is turned on, the updating of the counter during the individual period is prohibited and the display of the number of winnings is prohibited in the first winning ball counting process of FIG. Further, even when the notification extension flag is turned on, in the first winning ball counting process of FIG. 38, the update of the cumulative winning number counter by SS2 is not prohibited, so the notification extension control is performed. During the period, each time a winning ball to the first special variable winning ball device 66 is detected, the value of the cumulative winning number counter is updated. As a result, when the bonus continuation effect display as shown in (W7) of FIG. 37 is started between rounds, when the bonus continuation effect display is being performed, the player wins as shown in (W6) of FIG. Depending on the winning ball, as shown in (W7) of FIG. 37, the cumulative winning number is updated and displayed for the winning number. The notification extension flag is reset to the off state by ST20 when the round in which the notification extension flag is turned on ends.

  Then, ST10b starts a bonus continuation effect display that does not include the expected winning number display and the winning number display as shown in (W5) of FIG. Thereby, when the number of winnings in the individual period reaches the expected number of winnings in the middle of the round, the bonus continuous effect display that does not include the expected winning number display and the winning number display is started. After ST10b, the process proceeds to ST18, the individual period processed flag is set to the on state, and the process returns. Thereby, after the bonus continuous effect display is started in ST10b, in the normal round process of FIG. 40, it is determined by ST3 that the individual period processed flag is on, and the process returns.

  After the bonus continuation effect display is started in ST10b, the display content on the effect display device 44b is not changed until the round in which the bonus continuation effect display is started, and such bonus continuation effect display is performed. Is continued. When the round ends, the first big hit release pre-processing of FIG. 39 is performed, and at that time, SR17 and SR18 include a winning expected number display and a winning number display as shown in (W7) of FIG. Bonus continuous effect display starts.

  FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing a midway continuation round process according to the second embodiment. The midway continuation round process in FIG. 41 is a process that can be replaced with that in FIG. 41 will be described mainly with respect to the differences from FIG.

  41 is different from the process shown in FIG. 35 in the following point. The SU11 to SU13 in FIG. 35 relating to the mid-round continuation control are not provided, and instead, SU11a and SU11b relating to the notification extension control are provided. Further, between SU4 and SU5, SU4a and SU4b related to notification extension control are provided. Also, the SU 6a of FIG. 35 relating to the mid-round continuation control is not provided.

  Referring to FIG. 41, when it is determined by SU10 that the individual period counter is “0”, SU11a sets the above-described notification extension flag to the on state. In this way, when the notification extension flag is turned on, in the first winning ball counting process of FIG. 38, updating of the counter during the individual period is prohibited and updating of the winning number display is prohibited.

  Then, the SU 11b starts a bonus start effect display that does not include the expected winning number display and the winning number display similar to that shown in (W5) of FIG. 37, and returns. As a result, when the number of winnings in the individual period in the individual period for which the continuation timing is set reaches the expected number of winnings in the individual period at a time before it is determined that the continuation timing is in the middle of the round, the normal round process The same control as the notification extension control performed in step S3 is performed.

  When it is determined by SU4 that the midway notification determination timer has expired, it is determined by SU4a whether the notification extension flag is set to the on state. When it is determined by the SU 4a that the notification extension flag is set to the on state, the processing for resetting the notification extension flag to the off state is performed by the SU 4b according to the continuation timing, and the process proceeds to SU5. On the other hand, when it is determined by the SU 4a that the notification extension flag is not set to the on state, the process proceeds to the SU 5 as it is. Accordingly, when the continuation timing is reached, the update prohibition state of the counter during the individual period is canceled and the update prohibition state of the winning number display is canceled.

  Further, when it is determined by SU6 that the value of the counter during the individual period is not larger than “0”, the processing of the above-described SU15 to SU17 is performed, which is the same as that shown in (W7) of FIG. The bonus continuation effect display including the winning expected number display and the winning number display is started.

[Third Embodiment]
Next, a third embodiment will be described. In the third embodiment, in a specific jackpot game state, when the number of winnings in a certain round exceeds the prescribed number of winnings in one round, the number of winnings is the expected number of winnings in the middle of the subsequent round to which the relevant round belongs. A description will be given of an example in which display change control is performed instead of the above-described mid-round continuation control when arriving at. When the number of winnings reaches the expected number of winnings in the middle of the round in this way, the display change control does not give a clear notification that the specific jackpot gaming state will continue until the end of the round. Each time the number of winnings is counted by the counter, the display is changed to display a lucky image that can specify that a winning has been made, instead of a numerical value that specifies the winning number. In the third embodiment, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be mainly described.

  FIG. 42 is a timing chart showing the control timing of display change control. In FIG. 42, similarly to FIG. 12 described above, the relationship between the actual round progress and the display on the screen of the effect display device 44b is shown as time passes. With respect to FIG. 42, the description common to FIG. 12 described above will not be repeated.

  In FIG. 42, when the same bonus continuation pattern as in FIG. 12 is selected, the first individual period is due to the number of winnings in the first round being twelve and exceeding the prescribed number of winnings in one round. In the middle of the second round, an example of control when the number of winnings for the individual period has reached the expected number of winnings is shown.

  If the number of winnings in the first round reaches the expected number of winnings in the middle of the second round during the first individual period because the number of winnings in the first round, for example, is 12 and exceeds the prescribed number of winnings in the round, the display is changed. Control is performed. As shown in the figure, the display change control can specify that the image of the numerical value used for displaying the number of winnings has been won after the individual period winnings reached the expected number of winnings. It is changed to a lucky image (indicated by “L” in the figure) which is a predetermined image. Specifically, in the display change control, a winning ball to the first special variable winning ball device 66 is detected and the value of the counter during the individual period is updated until the individual period ends (the winning ball is changed). Lucky images are displayed each time they are counted.

  When such display change control is performed, there is no clear notification that the specific jackpot gaming state will continue. However, the lucky image is an image that suggests that the specific big hit gaming state continues, and by displaying this image, the player can recognize that the specific big hit gaming state continues.

  In addition, during the round immediately after the end of the round, in addition to the continuous notification for the next second individual period, a display of the expected number of winnings for the second individual period ("+20" in the figure), and Control is performed to start a new bonus continuation effect display ("Continue" in the figure) for displaying the number of individual period winnings for the second individual period ("20.19 ..." in the figure).

  Next, the display of the bonus effect when the display change control is performed due to excess of the number of winnings in the specific big hit gaming state will be described. FIG. 43 is a display screen diagram showing a display of a bonus effect when display change control is performed in the specific jackpot gaming state. In FIG. 43, the state of the display screen of the effect display device 44b is shown as time elapses in (X1) to (X10). 43, the description common to FIG. 17 described above will not be repeated.

  FIG. 43 shows the state of the display screen of the effect display device 44b in the control example shown in FIG. 42 over time for the specific jackpot gaming state in which the number of rounds is determined to be 8 rounds.

  As shown in (X1), after the first round is started and the display corresponding to the first round is started, as shown in (X2), the number of winnings in the first round is 12 and 1 The specified number of rounds was exceeded. Then, the second round is started as shown in (X2), and the number of winning prizes is counted as shown in (X3). Thereafter, as shown in (X4), in the middle of the second round during the first individual period, the number of individual period winnings reached the expected number of winnings. As a result, after the number of winnings for the individual period reaches the expected number of winnings, as shown in (X5), each time the winning ball is counted by the counter during the individual period, the star-shaped lucky image is displayed as the number of winnings for the individual period. It is displayed instead of the numerical value. For the lucky image, the color of the image is changed each time the winning ball is counted by the counter during the individual period, so that it is possible to specify that there is a winning every time the winning ball is counted. Such a lucky image is continuously displayed until the round in which the number of winnings in the individual period reaches the expected number of winnings as shown in (X6) by display change control.

  Then, as shown in (X6), when the winning condition of the round in which the winning ball is won in the first special variable winning ball device 66 and the individual period winning number reaches the expected winning number is satisfied, the second round is ended. . And, between the second round and the third round, a bonus continuation effect display (“continuation” in the figure) for performing continuous notification for the second individual period (third and fourth rounds) is performed. Control to start is performed. When the second bonus continuation effect display is started, as shown in (X6), an expected number of winnings display and a winning number display are performed.

  Next, display control when a specific big hit is achieved in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment will be described in detail. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the first winning ball counting process according to the third embodiment. The first winning ball counting process of FIG. 44 is a process that can be replaced with that of FIG. 44 will be described mainly with respect to the differences from FIG.

  The first winning ball counting process in FIG. 44 is different from the process in FIG. 31 in the following points. SS2b is provided between SS2 and SS3. SS5b is provided between SS5 and SS6. Further, SS7 for displaying a lucky image is provided.

In SS2b, it is determined whether or not the display change flag is set to the on state. Here, the display change flag is displayed when the condition for performing the display change control described above is satisfied, that is, when the number of winnings in a certain round exceeds the prescribed number of winnings in one round, It is set to the on state when the number of winnings reaches the expected winning number on the way. When it is determined by SS2b that the display change flag is not in the ON state, the individual period counter is updated by SS3 as in the case of FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined by SS2b that the display change flag is on, the process proceeds to SS4 without updating the individual period counter by SS3. Thereby, when the display change flag is in the ON state by SS2b, updating of the counter during the individual period is prohibited.

  In SS5b, it is determined whether or not the display change flag is set to the on state. When it is determined by SS5b that the display change flag is not in the on state, the winning number display is updated by SS6 as in the case of FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined that the display change flag is on by SS5b, the display of the cumulative winning number is updated based on the value of the cumulative winning number counter and the numerical value of the individual period winning number is displayed. Instead of a lucky image with a color selected by a predetermined color selection pattern (for example, every time the display change flag is turned on, the color is selected as white → yellow → red...). Is displayed and returns.

  Further, the first big hit release pretreatment according to the third embodiment is the same as that of FIG. 39 shown in the second embodiment.

  FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing normal round processing according to the third embodiment. The normal round process in FIG. 45 is a process that can replace the process in FIG. 45 will be described mainly with respect to the differences from FIG.

  The normal round process of FIG. 45 is different from the process of FIG. 34 in that ST10 to ST12 of FIG. 34 relating to the mid-round continuation control is not provided, and ST10c relating to the display change control is provided instead. That is.

  Referring to FIG. 45, when it is determined in ST9 that it does not belong to the final individual period, in ST10c, the above-described display change flag is set to the on state. As shown in (X5) of FIG. 43, the display change flag is turned on in the first state in the first winning ball counting process of FIG. 44 during the period in which the display change control is performed. Each time a winning ball to the one special variable winning ball device 66 is detected, a lucky image is displayed instead of an image of the number of winnings for the individual period, and the display of the cumulative winning number is updated. The display change flag is reset to the off state by ST20 when the round in which the display change flag is turned on ends. Note that the display change flag may be turned on without determining whether or not it belongs to the final individual period in ST9. That is, the lucky image may be displayed even in the final individual period.

  When the round ends, the first big hit release pre-processing of FIG. 39 is performed, and at that time, SR17 and SR18 include a winning expectation display and a winning display as shown in (X6) of FIG. Bonus continuous effect display starts.

  FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing a midway continuation round process according to the third embodiment. The midway continuation round process in FIG. 46 is a process that can replace the process in FIG. 46 will be described mainly with respect to differences from FIG.

46 is different from the process of FIG. 35 in the following points. The SU11 to SU13 of FIG. 35 relating to the mid-round continuation control are not provided, and instead, the SU11d relating to the display change control is provided. SU4c and SU4d related to display change control are provided between SU4 and SU5. Figure 3 related to continuous control during the round
5 SU6a is not provided.

  Referring to FIG. 46, when it is determined by SU10 that it is “0”, the aforementioned display change flag is set to ON by SU11d. When the display change flag is turned on in this way, every time a winning ball to the first special variable winning ball device 66 is detected in the first winning ball counting process of FIG. 44, (X5 of FIG. 43). In the same manner as shown in (1), a lucky image is displayed in place of the numerical image of the number of winnings for the individual period, and the display of the cumulative winning number is updated. As a result, when the number of winnings in the individual period in the individual period for which the continuation timing is set reaches the expected number of winnings in the individual period at a time before it is determined that the continuation timing is in the middle of the round, the normal round process The same control as the display change control performed in is performed.

  Further, when it is determined by SU4 that the midway notification determination timer has expired, it is determined by SU4c whether or not the display change flag is set to the on state. When it is determined by SU4c that the display change flag is set to the on state, processing for resetting the display change flag to the off state is performed by SU4d according to the continuation timing, and the process proceeds to SU5. On the other hand, when it is determined by the SU 4a that the display change flag is not set to the ON state, the process proceeds to the SU 5 as it is. Accordingly, when the continuation timing is reached, the prohibition of updating the counter during the individual period and the cancellation of the display of the lucky image are performed.

  If it is determined by SU6 that the value of the counter during the individual period is not greater than “0”, the above-described processing of SU15 to SU17 is performed, which is the same as that shown in (X6) of FIG. The bonus continuation effect display including the winning expected number display and the winning number display is started.

[Fourth Embodiment]
Next, a fourth embodiment will be described. In the fourth embodiment, in the specific jackpot gaming state, the expected number of winnings set to be increased and changed to a number larger than the prescribed number of winnings corresponding to the number of rounds executed in each individual period as the expected number of winnings in each individual period. A first example of changing the expected expected number increase change control to be notified will be described. In the fourth embodiment, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be mainly described.

  In the fourth embodiment, the expected number of winnings in each individual period of the bonus continuation pattern selected by SR7 of the first big hit release pre-processing is changed to, for example, a predetermined multiple, and the changed expected winning number is notified.

  47 and 48 are timing charts showing the control timing of the expected winning number increase change control. 47 and 48, as in FIG. 12 described above, the relationship between the actual round progress and the display on the screen of the effect display device 44b is shown as time passes. 47 and 48, the description common to FIG. 12 described above will not be repeated.

  FIG. 47 shows an example of control when the same bonus continuation pattern as in FIG. 12 is selected, and each round in each individual period has the same number of winnings as the prescribed number of winnings in one round. Has been. In this case, as the bonus continuation pattern, a bonus continuation pattern having the expected number of winnings of 20 for the first time, 20 for the second time, and 40 for the third time is selected. Then, by performing the winning expectation increase control, the notified expected winning numbers are 21 for the first time, 21 for the second time, and 42 for the third time.

  The display of the individual period winning numbers in each individual period starts from the expected number of winnings increased and changed, for example, as indicated by “21, 20, 19,... When there is an expected number of winnings equal to the prescribed number of winnings in each of the two rounds in each individual period, continuous notification is performed before the display of the individual period winning number is “0”.

  FIG. 48 shows an example of control when the bonus continuation pattern similar to that in FIG. 47 is selected and the number of winnings in the first round is 11 and exceeds the prescribed number of winnings in one round. ing. Since the notified expected number of winnings is increased and changed to 21 expected winning numbers which is one more than 20 which is the expected winning number corresponding to the number of rounds in the individual period, the number of winnings in the first round is 11 When the number of winning prizes in one round exceeds the prescribed number of winnings, the continuous notification is performed when the display of the winning number for individual period becomes “0”. In this way, by notifying the expected number of winnings that is greater than the expected number of winnings corresponding to the number of rounds in the individual period, even if the number of winnings in each round exceeds the prescribed number of winnings per round, the expected number of winnings in the production Can be continuously notified at the stage where the number of winnings is the same.

  Next, a description will be given of the display of the bonus effect when the winning expectation increase control is performed in the specific big hit gaming state. 49 and 50 are display screen diagrams showing a display of bonus effects when the winning expectation increase control is performed in the specific jackpot gaming state.

  FIG. 49 shows the state of the display screen of the effect display device 44b in the control example shown in FIG. 47 with respect to the specific big hit gaming state in (Y1) to (Y6) over time. 49, the description common to FIG. 17 described above will not be repeated.

  As shown in (Y1), when the first round is started, the expected number of winnings ("21") increased by the expected winning number increase change control is displayed as the expected number of winnings, and the number of individual period winnings is displayed. Is displayed from the expected number of winnings ("21") increased. Then, when there is the same number of winnings as the prescribed number of winnings in each round in each individual period, as shown in (Y3) and (Y5), before the display of the individual period winning number is “0”. Then, control for starting the bonus continuation effect display (“continuation” in the figure) is performed.

  FIG. 50 shows the state of the display screen of the effect display device 44b in the control example shown in FIG. 48 with respect to the specific jackpot gaming state in (Y11) to (Y16) as time elapses. 50, the description common to FIG. 49 described above will not be repeated.

  When the number of winnings in the first round is 11 and exceeds the prescribed number of winnings in one round, the notified expected winning number is 1 than 20 which is the expected winning number corresponding to the number of rounds in the individual period. Since the number of winning prizes is increased and changed, as shown in (Y12), when the display of the number of winnings in the individual period becomes “0”, continuous notification is performed as shown in (Y13).

  Next, display control when a specific big hit is achieved in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fourth embodiment will be described in detail. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the first big hit release pre-processing according to the fourth embodiment. The first big hit pre-opening process in FIG. 51 is a process that replaces that in FIG. 51 will be described mainly with respect to the differences from FIG.

  The first big hit release pre-processing of FIG. 51 is different from the processing of FIG. 32 in that SR7a is provided between SR7 and SR8, and that SR16 related to continuous delay control in FIG. 32 is not provided. It is.

In SR7a, a process of increasing and changing the expected number of winnings in each individual period in the bonus continuation pattern selected in SR7 and setting it as the expected number of winnings used for the bonus effect is performed. Specifically, the SR 7a increases and changes the expected number of winnings by performing an operation of increasing and changing the expected number of winnings for each individual period in the selected bonus continuation pattern by 5%. Thereby, for example, the expected number of winnings “20” is increased and changed to “21”, and the expected number of winnings “40” is increased and changed to “42”. Thereby, for example, in SR9, SR10, SR17, SR18, by using the expected number of winnings after the increase change, for example, as shown in (Y1), (Y3) of FIG. In each of the bonus continuation effect displays, the expected number of winnings after the increase change is notified. In the case of this embodiment, since the continuous delay control is not performed, SR16 is not provided, and when SR15 determines that the midway notification flag is off, SR17 determines the next individual Data necessary for the bonus effect such as the expected number of winnings for the period and the initial value of the counter during the individual period will be set.

  FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing normal round processing according to the fourth embodiment. The normal round process in FIG. 52 is a process that can replace the process in FIG. 52 will be described mainly with respect to differences from FIG.

  The normal round process of FIG. 52 differs from the process of FIG. 34 in that ST6, ST7, and ST22 to ST27 of FIG. 34 relating to continuous delay control are not provided. Therefore, when it is determined by ST4 that the value of the counter during the individual period is “0”, ST6 as shown in FIG. 34 is not performed and the process of ST8 is performed. If it is determined by ST21 that it is not the final round in the entire period, the processing of ST28 is performed without performing the processing of ST22 to ST27.

  Further, in ST10, ST11, ST15, and ST16, the expected number of winnings after the increase change is used, and in the bonus continuous effect display started in ST16, the expected number of winnings based on the expected number of winnings after the increase change is notified. Will be.

  FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing a midway continuation round process according to the fourth embodiment. The midway continuation round process in FIG. 53 is a process that can replace the process in FIG. 53 will be described mainly with respect to the differences from FIG.

  53 is different from the process of FIG. 34 in that the SU6, SU7 to SU9, and SU19 to SU23 of FIG. 35 related to the continuous delay control are not provided. Therefore, after the midway notification time elapse flag is set to the on state by SU5, it is determined whether or not the midway notification flag is set to the on state by SU6a. When it is determined by the SU 6a that the midway notification flag is not in the on state, the number of winnings during the round in the individual period does not exceed the prescribed number of winnings, and the above-described processing of SU15 to SU17 is performed. As a result, the bonus continuation effect display is performed. On the other hand, when it is determined by the SU 6a that the midway notification flag is in the on state, since the midway round continuation control has already been performed at a time before the continuation timing during the round, the bonus continuation effect display is displayed. Otherwise, the process of resetting the midway notification flag to the off state is performed by the SU 6b, and the process returns.

  In addition, in SU11, SU12, SU15, and SU16, the expected number of winnings after the increased change is used, and in the bonus continuous effect display started in SU16, the expected number of winnings based on the expected number of winnings after the increased change is notified. Will be.

[Fifth Embodiment]
Next, a fifth embodiment will be described. In the fifth embodiment, a second example in which the expected winning number increase change control described in the fourth embodiment is performed in the specific jackpot gaming state will be described. In the fifth embodiment, a configuration in which the continuous delay control described in the first embodiment and the like is performed in addition to the expected winning number increase change control described in the fourth embodiment will be described.

  In the fifth embodiment, as in the fourth embodiment, the expected number of winnings in each individual period of the bonus continuation pattern selected by SR7 of the first big hit release pre-processing is changed to, for example, a predetermined multiple, The expected number of winnings will be notified.

  Next, display control when a specific big hit is achieved in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fifth embodiment will be described in detail. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the first big hit release pre-processing according to the fifth embodiment. The first big hit release pre-processing in FIG. 54 is a process that replaces that in FIG. 54 will be described mainly with respect to the differences from FIG.

  The first big hit release pre-processing of FIG. 54 is different from the processing of FIG. 32 in that SR7a is provided between SR7 and SR8.

  In SR7a, similarly to SR7a in FIG. 51, a process is performed in which the expected number of winnings in each individual period in the bonus continuation pattern selected by SR7 is increased and set as the expected number of winnings used for the bonus effect. Specifically, the SR 7a increases and changes the expected number of winnings by performing an operation of increasing and changing the expected number of winnings for each individual period in the selected bonus continuation pattern by 5%. Thereby, for example, the expected number of winnings “20” is increased and changed to “21”, and the expected number of winnings “40” is increased and changed to “42”. Thereby, for example, in SR9, SR10, SR17, SR18, by using the expected number of winnings after the increase change, for example, as shown in (Y1), (Y3) of FIG. In each of the bonus continuation effect displays, the expected number of winnings after the increase change is notified.

  Further, in ST10, ST11, ST15, ST16, ST25, and ST26 in the normal round process of FIG. 34, the bonus expected effect number after the increase change is used, so that the bonus continuous effect display started in ST16 is after the increase change. The expected number of winnings based on the expected number of winnings will be notified.

  In addition, in SU7, SU8, SU11, SU12, SU15, and SU16 in the mid-continuation round process of FIG. 35, the bonus change continuation display started in ST16 is used for an increase change by using the expected number of winnings after the increase change. The expected number of winnings based on the expected number of winnings will be notified.

[Sixth Embodiment]
Next, a sixth embodiment will be described. In the sixth embodiment, an example will be described in which the count limit control is performed when the number of winnings in a certain round exceeds the prescribed number of winnings in one round without performing the above-described mid-round continuation control in the specific big hit gaming state. . In the count limit control, when the number of winnings in one round exceeds the specified number of winnings in one round during the individual period, the winning amount by the counter during the individual period is the same as the number of excess winnings with respect to the specified winning number in the next round. This is control for limiting the counting of numbers (specifically, stopping counting). In the sixth embodiment, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be mainly described.

  FIG. 55 is a timing chart showing the control timing of the count limit control. 55, as in FIG. 12 described above, the relationship between the actual round progress and the display on the screen of the effect display device 44b is shown as time passes. With respect to FIG. 55, the description common to FIG. 12 described above will not be repeated.

  FIG. 55 shows an example of control when the bonus continuation pattern similar to that in FIG. 12 is selected and the number of winnings in the first round becomes 12 and exceeds the prescribed number of winnings in one round. ing.

  When the number of winnings in the first round is 12, for example, and exceeds the prescribed number of winnings in one round, counting limit control is performed. When the number of winnings in one round (in this case, the first round) exceeds the prescribed number of winnings (10) in one round, the counting limit control is exceeded in the next round (in this case, the second round) The counting of the number of winnings by the individual period counter is stopped by the number of winnings. As a result, as indicated by “8, 8, 8” in the winning number display, the update updating of the winning number display is stopped by the excess winning number.

  When such count limit control is performed, counting of the number of winnings by the counter during the individual period is stopped for the number of winnings in the round, so when the number of winnings in a round exceeds the prescribed number of winnings in one round Even so, it is possible to match the time when the display of the number of winnings in the individual period becomes 0 at the end of the individual period.

  Next, the display of the bonus effect when the count limit control is performed due to the excess of the number of winnings in the specific big hit gaming state will be described. FIG. 56 is a display screen diagram showing a display of a bonus effect when the count limit control is performed in the specific big hit gaming state. In FIG. 56, the state of the display screen of the effect display device 44b is shown as time elapses in (Z1) to (Z11). 56, the description common to FIG. 17 described above will not be repeated.

  FIG. 56 shows the state of the display screen of the effect display device 44b in the control example shown in FIG. 55 over time for the specific jackpot gaming state in which the number of rounds is determined to be 8 rounds.

  As shown in (Z1), after the first round is started and the display corresponding to the first round is started, as shown in (Z2), the number of winnings in the first round is 12 and 1 The specified number of rounds was exceeded. Then, the second round is started as shown in (Z2). In this way, in the round following the round in which the number of winnings in one round exceeds the prescribed number of winnings, as shown in (Z3) and (Z5), the game ball wins the first special variable winning ball device 66, and the first Even if it is detected by the 1-count switch 106, the count limit control is performed, so that the display of the number of winnings for the individual period is not updated and updated by the number of excess winnings as shown in (Z4) and (Z6). After the number of winning balls for the excess number of winnings is detected by the first count switch 106, the display of the number of winnings for the individual period can be increased and updated.

  Next, display control when a specific big hit is achieved in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the sixth embodiment will be described in detail. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the first winning ball counting process according to the sixth embodiment. The first winning ball counting process in FIG. 57 is a process that can be replaced with that in FIG. 57 will be described mainly with respect to the differences from FIG.

  The first winning ball counting process of FIG. 57 differs from the process of FIG. 31 in that SS2c to SS2e are provided.

After the value of the cumulative winning number counter is updated by adding “1” in SS2, it is determined in SS2c whether or not the count limit flag is set to the on state. Here, the count limit flag is set to the on state when the above-described condition for performing the count limit control is satisfied, that is, when it is determined that the number of winnings in the previous round exceeds the prescribed number of winnings in one round. Is done. When it is determined by SS2c that the count limit flag is not in the ON state, the individual period counter is subtracted and updated by SS3 as in the case of FIG.

  On the other hand, when it is determined by SS2c that the count limit flag is on, it is determined by SS2d whether or not the value of the count limit counter is “0”. The counting limit counter is a counter for counting the number of times the counting by the counter during the individual period is stopped when winning a game ball, and when the counting limit flag is turned on, the same numerical value as the excess winning number at that time And is counted down every time a winning ball is detected. When it is determined by SS2d that the value of the count limit counter is not “0”, the value of the count limit counter is updated by subtracting “1” by SS2e, and the process proceeds to SS4. As a result, when the count limit flag is in the ON state, counting by the counter during the individual period is stopped until the value of the count limit counter becomes “0”. Thus, when counting by the counter during the individual period is stopped, even if a winning ball is detected, the value of the counter during the individual period is not updated. Therefore, when the winning number display is updated in SS6, ( As shown in Z3) to (Z6), the display of the number of winnings for the individual period is not updated.

  Further, the first big hit release pretreatment according to the sixth embodiment is the same as that of FIG. 39 shown in the second embodiment.

  FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing normal round processing according to the sixth embodiment. The normal round process in FIG. 58 is a process that can replace the process in FIG. 58 will be described mainly with respect to the differences from FIG.

  The normal round process in FIG. 58 differs from the process in FIG. 34 mainly in the following points. ST8 to ST12 of FIG. 34 relating to the mid-round continuation control are not provided, and ST10d to ST10h relating to the count limit control are provided instead. Further, ST18a related to the count limit control is provided between ST2 and ST19 in FIG. Further, the processing performed according to the determination results of ST4 and ST6 is different from the case of FIG.

  Referring to FIG. 58, when it is determined at ST2 that the round is at the end, the winning number counted during the round by the counter during round is stored in RAM 902 as winning number data during the previous round by ST18a. . Thus, data indicating the number of winnings counted during the round is stored every time each round is completed. After the data is stored in ST18a, the round counter is initialized in ST19.

  If it is determined by ST4 that the value of the counter during the individual period is not “0”, the current round specified by the round number counter is specified by the bonus continuation pattern selected by SR7 by ST10d. Whether or not the current round is the first round of the individual period is determined based on confirming whether or not it matches the first round of the individual period. If it is determined by ST10d that it is the first round, the first round returns because there is no previous round in the individual period. On the other hand, when it is determined by ST10d that it is not the first round, ST10e determines that the number of winnings in the previous round is the prescribed number of winnings (one round) based on the winning number data stored in ST18a in the previous round. It is determined whether or not (10) is exceeded.

When it is determined by ST10e that the number of winnings in the previous round does not exceed the prescribed number of winnings in one round, the process returns. On the other hand, when it is determined by ST10e that the number of winnings in the previous round exceeds the prescribed number of winnings in one round, it is necessary to perform count limiting processing. At that time, in ST10f, a process of calculating the excess winning number with respect to the prescribed winning number in the previous round is performed. Specifically, in ST10f, the excess winning number is calculated by subtracting the prescribed winning number (10) from the value of the winning data in the previous round stored in ST18a. Then, in ST10g, the excess winning number calculated in ST10f is set in the above-described count limit counter. Then, in ST10h, the aforementioned count limit flag is set to the on state. Thereby, the update of the counter value during the individual period is stopped by the number of excess winnings set in the counting limit counter by the first winning ball counting process of FIG. After ST10h, the process proceeds to ST18. As a result, after the count limit counter and the count limit flag are set, it is determined YES in ST3, thereby preventing ST10d to ST10h from being repeated. The count limit flag is reset to the off state by ST20 when the round in which the count limit flag is turned on ends.

  When it is determined in ST4 that the value of the counter during the individual period is “0”, it is determined in ST6 whether or not the delay notification flag is set to the on state. If it is determined in ST6 that the delay notification flag is on, the process proceeds to ST7, and a bonus continuous effect display by continuous delay control is performed in ST15 to ST18. On the other hand, when it is determined in ST6 that the delay notification flag is in the off state, in the present embodiment, since the mid-round continuation control is not performed, the process returns.

  FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing a midway continuation round process according to the sixth embodiment. The midway continuation round process in FIG. 59 is a process that can replace the process in FIG. 59 will be described mainly with respect to the differences from FIG.

  59 is different from the process in FIG. 35 in the following point. The SU11 to SU13 in FIG. 35 relating to the mid-round continuation control are not provided, and SU11e to SU11i relating to the count limit control are provided instead. SU4e and SU4f related to the count limit control are provided between SU4 and SU5. An SU 24 related to count limit control is provided between SU2 and SU25. The SU 6a of FIG. 35 relating to the mid-round continuation control is not provided.

  Referring to FIG. 59, when it is determined by SU4 that the midway notification determination timer has not timed out, SU11e is performing the previous round based on the winning data stored in ST18a in the previous round. It is determined whether or not the number of winnings exceeds the prescribed number (10) of winnings per round.

  When SU11e determines that the number of winnings in the previous round does not exceed the prescribed number of winnings in one round, the process returns. On the other hand, when it is determined by the SU 11e that the number of winnings in the previous round exceeds the prescribed number of winnings in one round, it is necessary to perform a count limiting process. At that time, whether or not the count limit flag is set to the on state is determined by the SU 11f. When SU11f determines that the count limit flag is on, the process returns. On the other hand, when it is determined by the SU 11f that the count limit flag is not in the ON state, the SU 11g performs a process of producing an excess winning number with respect to the prescribed winning number in the previous round, similarly to the above-described ST 10f. Then, the surplus number calculated in SU11g is set in the count limit counter by SU11h. Then, the aforementioned count limit flag is set to the on state by SU 11i, and the process returns. Thereby, the update of the counter value during the individual period is stopped by the number of excess winnings set in the counting limit counter by the first winning ball counting process of FIG. As a result, the same control as the count limiting process performed in the normal round process is performed. In addition, after the count limit counter and the count limit flag are set, the determination of YES by SU11f prevents the SU11g to SU10i from being repeatedly performed.

  When it is determined by SU4 that the midway notification determination timer has expired, it is determined by SU4e whether or not the count limit flag is set to the on state. When the count limit flag is set to the ON state by SU4e, processing for resetting the count limit flag to the OFF state is performed by SU4f according to the continuation timing, and the process proceeds to SU5. On the other hand, when the count limit flag is not set to ON by SU4e, the process proceeds to SU5 as it is. Thus, when the continuation timing is reached, the suspension of updating the value of the counter during the individual period is cancelled.

  If it is determined by SU2 that the round is over, the winning count counted during the round by the round counter is stored in the RAM 902 as winning count data during the previous round by SU24, and the process proceeds to SU25.

[Seventh Embodiment]
Next, a seventh embodiment will be described. In the seventh embodiment, in the specific jackpot game state, the continuous delay control shown in the first embodiment and the like is not performed, and the number of winnings in a round is counted when the number of winnings in a round is less than the prescribed winning number in one round. An example in which double control is performed will be described. In the count doubling control, when the number of winnings in one round is less than the prescribed number of winnings in one round during the individual period, the counting value by the individual period counter for one game ball in the next round This is a control for doubling the count value by adding a plurality of and increasing the count value by the number of insufficient winning prizes. In the seventh embodiment, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be mainly described.

  FIG. 60 is a timing chart showing the control timing of the count doubling control. In FIG. 60, similarly to FIG. 13 described above, the relationship between the actual round progress and the display on the screen of the effect display device 44b is shown as time passes. 60, the description common to FIG. 13 described above will not be repeated.

  In FIG. 60, when the same bonus continuation pattern as in FIG. 13 is selected, the control example when the number of winnings in the first round is eight and the prescribed number of winnings in one round is insufficient is shown. It is shown.

  When the number of winnings in the first round is, for example, 8 and becomes less than the prescribed number of winnings in the round, count doubling control is performed. Count doubling control is performed when the number of winnings in a round (in this case, the first round) is less than the prescribed number of winnings (10) in one round, in the next round (in this case, the second round) In this control, a plurality of count values obtained by a counter during an individual period are added to one game ball (for example, two are added) to double the count value and increase the count value by the number of insufficient winning prizes. As a result, as indicated by “8, 10, 12” in the winning number display, the counted value in the winning number display is increased by the excess winning number.

  When such count doubling control is performed, the count value for one game ball is doubled, so that the count value of the winning number by the counter during the individual period is increased by the number of short winning prizes of one round, Even when the number of winnings in a certain round is less than the prescribed number of winnings in one round, it is possible to match the time when the display of the number of winnings in the individual period becomes 0 at the end of the individual period.

Next, the display of the bonus effect when the count doubling control is performed due to the shortage of the number of winnings in the specific big hit gaming state will be described. FIG. 61 is a display screen diagram showing a display of bonus effects when the count doubling control is performed in the specific big hit gaming state. In FIG. 61, the state of the display screen of the effect display device 44b is shown as time elapses in (Z21) to (Z31). About FIG. 61, the description which overlaps with FIG. 18 mentioned above is not repeated.

  FIG. 61 shows the state of the display screen of the effect display device 44b in the control example shown in FIG. 60 over time for the specific jackpot gaming state in which the number of rounds is determined to be 8 rounds.

  As shown in (Z21), after the first round is started and the display corresponding to the first round is started, as shown in (Z22), the number of winnings in the first round is 8 and 1 There was a shortage of the number of winnings in the round. Then, the second round is started as shown in (Z22). In this way, in the round following the round in which the number of winnings in one round is less than the prescribed number of winnings (in this case, the second round), as shown in (Z23) and (Z25), the game ball is the first special variable. By performing count doubling control in which two count values that are doubled with respect to one winning ball are added when the winning ball device 66 is won and detected by the first count switch 106 ( As shown in (Z4) and (Z6), the display of the number of winnings for the individual period is increased and updated by the number of winning shortages. After the number of winning balls for the insufficient number of winnings is detected by the first count switch 106, the count doubling control is terminated.

  Next, display control when a specific big hit is achieved in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the seventh embodiment will be described in detail. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing a first winning ball counting process according to the seventh embodiment. The first winning ball counting process in FIG. 62 is a process that can be replaced with that in FIG. 62 will be described mainly with respect to the differences from FIG.

  The first winning ball counting process in FIG. 62 is different from the process in FIG. 31 in that SS2f to SS2i are provided.

  After the value of the cumulative winning number counter is updated by adding “1” in SS2, it is determined in SS2f whether or not the count doubling flag is set to the on state. Here, the count doubling flag is turned on when the above-described condition for performing the count doubling control is satisfied, that is, when it is determined that the number of winnings in the previous round is less than the prescribed number of winnings in one round. Set. When it is determined by SS2f that the count doubling flag is not in the ON state, the individual period counter is subtracted and updated by SS3 as in the case of FIG.

  On the other hand, when it is determined by SS2f that the count doubling flag is on, it is determined by SS2g whether or not the value of the count doubling counter is “0”. The count doubling counter is a counter for counting the number of times that the count value by the counter during the individual period is doubled (doubled) when winning a game ball. When the count doubling flag is turned on, there is a shortage at that time It is set to the same numerical value as the number of winnings, and is counted down every time a winning ball is detected. When it is determined by SS2g that the value of the count doubling counter is not “0”, the value of the counter during individual period is decremented by “2” and updated by SS2h, and the value of the count doubling counter is decremented by “1” by SS2i. Updated and proceeds to SS4. Thus, when the count doubling flag is in the ON state, the count value for one winning ball by the counter during the individual period is doubled until the value of the count doubling counter becomes “0”. In this way, when the count value for one winning ball by the individual period counter is doubled, the value of the individual period counter is updated by “2” every time one winning ball is detected, so that the winning is made at SS6. When the number display is updated, as shown in (Z3) to (Z6) of FIG. 61, two individual period winning numbers are counted for one winning ball.

  Further, the first big hit release pretreatment according to the seventh embodiment is the same as that of FIG. 51 shown in the fourth embodiment.

  FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing a normal round process according to the seventh embodiment. The normal round process in FIG. 63 is a process that can replace the process in FIG. 63 will be described mainly with respect to the differences from FIG.

  The normal round process of FIG. 63 differs from the process of FIG. 34 mainly in the following points. This means that ST6, ST7, and ST22 to ST27 in FIG. 34 relating to continuous delay control are not provided. Therefore, when it is determined by ST4 that it is “0”, ST6 of FIG. 34 is not performed and the process of ST8 is performed. If it is determined by ST21 that it is not the final round in the entire period, the processing of ST28 is performed without performing the processing of ST22 to ST27. Further, as processing related to the count doubling control, ST4a to ST4e performed when it is determined by ST4 that the value of the counter during the individual period is not “0” are provided. Also, ST18a related to the count doubling control is provided between ST2 and ST19 in FIG. Further, the processing performed according to the determination results of ST4 and ST6 is different from the case of FIG.

  Referring to FIG. 63, when it is determined at ST2 that the round is over, ST18a stores the number of winnings counted during the round from the during-round counter in RAM 902 as winning number data during the previous round. . Thus, data indicating the number of winnings counted during the round is stored every time each round is completed. After the data is stored in ST18a, the round counter is initialized in ST19.

  If it is determined by ST4 that the value of the counter during the individual period is not "0", the current round specified by the round number counter is specified by ST4a by the bonus continuation pattern selected by SR7. Whether or not the current round is the first round of the individual period is determined based on confirming whether or not it matches the first round of the individual period. If it is determined by ST4a that it is the first round, the first round returns because there is no previous round in the individual period. On the other hand, when it is determined by ST4a that it is not the first round, ST4b determines that the winning number in the previous round is one round based on the winning number data stored in the previous round by ST18a or SU24 described later. It is determined whether or not the number is less than the prescribed number of winnings (10).

  If it is determined by ST4b that the number of winnings in the previous round is not less than the prescribed number of winnings in one round, the process returns. On the other hand, if it is determined by ST4b that the number of winnings in the previous round is less than the prescribed number of winnings in one round, it is necessary to perform a count doubling process. At that time, a process of producing an insufficient number of winnings with respect to the prescribed number of winnings in the previous round is performed in ST4c. Specifically, in ST4c, the insufficient winning number is calculated by subtracting the value of the winning data in the previous round stored in ST18a from the prescribed winning number (10). Then, in ST4d, the insufficient winning number calculated in ST4c is set in the above-described count doubling counter. Then, in ST4e, the aforementioned count doubling flag is set to the on state, and the process returns. Thereby, the count value for one winning ball by the counter during the individual period is doubled by the number of insufficient winnings set in the counting double counter by the first winning ball counting process of FIG. After ST4e, the process proceeds to ST18. As a result, after the count doubling counter and the count doubling flag are set, it is determined YES in ST3, thereby preventing ST4a to ST4e from being repeated. The count doubling flag is reset to the off state by ST20 when the round in which the counting doubling flag is turned on ends.

Further, when it is determined by ST4 that the value of the counter during the individual period is “0”, by proceeding to ST8, the winning number in the round has reached the prescribed number of winnings in one round by ST8. On the condition that it is determined that the current round does not belong to the final individual period in the specific jackpot gaming state by ST9, the bonus continuation effect display by the round continuation control is performed.

  FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing a midway continuation round process according to the seventh embodiment. The midway continuation round process in FIG. 64 is a process that can replace the process in FIG. 64 will be described mainly with respect to differences from FIG.

  The midway continuation round process of FIG. 64 differs from the process of FIG. 35 in the following points. The SU6, SU7 to SU9, and SU19 to SU23 of FIG. 35 relating to the continuous delay control are not provided. Further, as processing related to the count doubling control, STU32 to SU36 which are performed when the value of the counter during the individual period is determined not to be “0” by SU10 are provided. SU4g and SU4h related to the count doubling control are provided between SU4 and SU5. The SU 24 related to the count doubling control is provided between the SU 2 and the SU 25.

  Further, when it is determined by SU4 that the midway notification determination timer has not expired and the value of the individual period counter is not "0" by SU10, SU32 determines in the previous round. Based on the number-of-rounds winning data stored in ST18a, it is determined whether the number of winnings in the previous round is less than the prescribed number of winnings in one round, as in ST4b described above.

  When SU32 determines that the number of winnings in the previous round is not less than the prescribed number of winnings in one round, the process returns. On the other hand, when it is determined by the SU 32 that the number of winnings in the previous round is less than the prescribed number of winnings in one round, it is necessary to perform a count doubling process. At that time, at that time, it is determined by SU33 whether or not the count doubling flag is set to the on state. If SU33 determines that the count doubling flag is on, the process returns. On the other hand, when it is determined by the SU 33 that the count doubling flag is not in the ON state, the SU 34 performs a process of calculating an insufficient winning number with respect to the predetermined winning number in the previous round, similarly to the above-described ST4c. Then, the SU 35 sets the insufficient winning number calculated in the SU 34 in the above-described count doubling counter. Then, the above-mentioned count doubling flag is set to the ON state by SU 36, and the routine returns. Thereby, the count value for one winning ball by the counter during the individual period is doubled by the number of insufficient winnings set in the counting double counter by the first winning ball counting process of FIG. As a result, the same control as the count doubling process performed in the normal round process is performed. In addition, after the count doubling counter and the count doubling flag are set, the determination of YES by SU33 prevents SU34 to SU36 from being repeated.

  When it is determined by SU4 that the midway notification determination timer has expired, it is determined by SU4g whether the count doubling lag is set to the on state. When the count doubling flag is set to ON by SU4g, processing for resetting the count doubling flag to OFF is performed by SU4h according to the continuation timing, and the process proceeds to SU5. On the other hand, when the count doubling flag is not set to ON by SU4g, the process proceeds to SU5 as it is. Thus, when the continuation timing is reached, the count doubling control ends.

Moreover, after the midway notification time elapse flag is set to the on state by SU5, it is determined whether or not the midway notification flag is set to the on state by SU6a. When it is determined by the SU 6a that the midway notification flag is not in the on state, the number of winnings during the round in the individual period does not exceed the prescribed number of winnings, and the above-described processing of SU15 to SU17 is performed. As a result, the bonus continuation effect display is performed. On the other hand, when it is determined by the SU 6a that the midway notification flag is in the on state, since the midway round continuation control has already been performed at a time before the continuation timing during the round, the bonus continuation effect display is displayed. A process for resetting the midway notification flag to the off state is performed, and the process returns.

  When it is determined by SU2 that the round is at the end of the round, the winning count counted during the round by the round counter is stored in the RAM 902 as winning count data during the previous round by SU24, and the process proceeds to SU25.

Next, main effects obtained by the embodiment described above will be described.
(1) As shown in FIG. 17 of the first embodiment, in the specific big hit gaming state, individual control is performed during the execution of the bonus start effect display or during the execution of the bonus continuous effect display by performing the mid-round continuation control. When the number of winnings for the individual period counted by the counter during the period is greater than the expected number of winnings notified by these effects, the bonus continuous effect display is performed at the timing when the winning number for the individual period reaches the expected number of winnings. When there are more wins than the prescribed number of wins, only the number of wins is added to the expected number of wins notified by the bonus continuation effect display for the next individual period. As a result, even when there are more prizes than the prescribed number of prizes in one round, the bonus continuation effect display is executed even during the round when the expected number of prizes notified for the individual period is reached. Even though the actual number of winnings has reached the expected number of winnings, it is possible to prevent the continuous notification by the bonus continuous effect display from being performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with respect to the relationship between the number of winning prizes and the notification that the specific jackpot gaming state continues. In addition, when there are more wins than the specified number of wins in the round, only the number of wins will be added to the expected number of wins that will be announced on the bonus continuation effect display for the next individual period. The expected number of winnings that are notified can be matched to the number that can be won in the next individual period. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with respect to the relationship between the notified expected winning number and the actual number that can be won. In this way, by making the player not feel uncomfortable with respect to the performance in the specific jackpot gaming state, it is possible to prevent the player from being distrusted with respect to the performance in the jackpot gaming state.

(2) As shown in FIG. 17 of the first embodiment, in the specific big hit gaming state, 1 is executed during the execution of the bonus start effect display or during the execution of the bonus continuous effect display by performing the mid-round continuation control. When the number of winnings for individual period reaches the expected number of winnings when the number of winnings for individual period reaches the expected number of winnings due to the number of winnings counted during the round being greater than the prescribed number of winnings per round The bonus continuation effect display is performed, and the larger number of winnings is added to the expected number of winnings notified by the bonus continuation effect display for the next individual period. As a result, even when there are more prizes than the prescribed number of prizes in one round, the bonus continuation effect display is executed even during the round when the expected number of prizes notified for the individual period is reached. Even though the actual number of winnings has reached the expected number of winnings, it is possible to prevent the continuous notification by the bonus continuous effect display from being performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with respect to the relationship between the number of winning prizes and the notification that the specific jackpot gaming state continues. Furthermore, when the number of winnings counted during one round is larger than the expected number of winnings for the individual period due to the number of winnings being counted more than the prescribed number of winnings for one round, only the number of winnings is increased. Since it is added to the expected number of winnings notified in the bonus continuous effect display for the next individual period, it is possible to match the expected number of winnings notified in the next individual period with the number that can be won in the next individual period. it can. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with respect to the relationship between the notified expected winning number and the actual number that can be won. In this way, by making the player not feel uncomfortable with respect to the performance in the specific jackpot gaming state, it is possible to prevent the player from being distrusted with respect to the performance in the jackpot gaming state.

  (3) As shown in FIG. 37 of the second embodiment, in the specific jackpot gaming state, the notification extension control is performed, so that during the execution of the bonus start effect display or the bonus continuation effect display, the individual period From the time when the number of winnings for the individual period counted by the medium counter reaches the expected number of winnings notified by these effects until the end of the round at that time, the bonus game effect display continues by the bonus continuous effect display. The notification to that effect is continued, and the counting of the number of individual winnings by the individual period counter is prohibited. As a result, there are more winnings than the prescribed number of winnings in one round, and when the number of winnings in the individual period reaches the expected number of winnings in the middle of the individual period, the round that has reached the expected number of winnings ends. Until then, the continuous notification is continued. For this reason, since the bonus continuation effect display is executed even during the round when the expected number of winnings notified for the individual period is reached, the actual number of winnings has reached the expected number of winnings. Further, it is possible to prevent the continuous notification by the bonus continuous effect display from being performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with respect to the relationship between the number of winning prizes and the notification that the specific jackpot gaming state continues. Furthermore, since the counting of the number of individual winnings by the individual period counter is prohibited from the time when the expected number of winnings is reached until the round when the expected number of winnings is completed, the notified expected winnings are announced. With respect to the relationship between the number and the number actually won, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable. In this way, by making the player not feel uncomfortable with respect to the performance in the specific jackpot gaming state, it is possible to prevent the player from being distrusted with respect to the performance in the jackpot gaming state.

  (4) As shown in FIG. 43 of the third embodiment, in the specific jackpot gaming state, the display change control is performed, so that during the execution of the bonus start effect display or the bonus continuous effect display, the individual period The individual period counter is counted by the individual period counter from when the number of individual period winnings counted by the medium counter reaches the expected number of prizes notified by these effects until the end of the round at that time. Each time, a lucky image that can specify that a prize has been won is displayed instead of a numerical image indicating the number of prizes won during individual periods. As a result, when there are more winnings than the prescribed number of winnings in one round and the expected number of winnings notified by the first effect is reached in the middle of the round, Until the end of the round at that time, each time the individual period winning number is counted by the individual period counter, it is possible to specify that there was a winning instead of a numerical image indicating the individual period winning number. A lucky image is displayed. Thereby, although it does not alert | report directly that a specific game state continues with a lucky image, it can be suggested. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with respect to the relationship between the number of winning prizes and the notification that the specific jackpot gaming state continues. In addition, since the lucky image is displayed in such a manner, since the number of winnings for individual period is not displayed from when the expected number of winnings is reached until the end of the round at that time, the notified expected number of winnings is announced. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with respect to the relationship between the actual number of winnings and the number of winnings. In this way, by making the player not feel uncomfortable with respect to the performance in the specific jackpot gaming state, it is possible to prevent the player from being distrusted with respect to the performance in the jackpot gaming state.

(5) As shown in FIG. 49, FIG. 50 and the fifth embodiment of the fourth embodiment, in the specific big hit game state, the bonus start effect display and the bonus continuation effect are performed by performing the control for increasing the expected number of winnings. In the display, the expected number of winnings set to a number larger than the prescribed number of winnings corresponding to the number of rounds in the individual period is notified. This makes it possible to prevent the notified expected number of winnings from being reached even when there are more than the prescribed number of winnings in one round, so that the actual number of winnings reaches the expected number of winnings. In spite of this, it is possible to prevent the situation where the notification that the specific jackpot gaming state continues is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with respect to the relationship between the number of winning prizes and the notification that the specific jackpot gaming state will continue. In this way, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with respect to the performance in the specific jackpot gaming state, so that the player is not distrusted with respect to the performance in the jackpot gaming state. Is possible.

  (6) As shown in FIGS. 49 and 50, when the winning expected number increase control is performed, when the final round of the individual period ends, the individual period winning number becomes the expected winning number notified for the individual period. Even if the time has not been reached, the bonus continuation effect display is performed. For this reason, an error in the expected number of winnings caused by setting the expected number of winnings to be notified to be higher than the prescribed number of winnings corresponding to the number of rounds in the individual period will not affect the next bonus continuation effect. Can be.

  (7) As shown in FIG. 56 of the sixth embodiment, in the specific big hit gaming state, counting is controlled during one round during execution of the bonus start effect display and the bonus continuation effect display by performing count limit control. When the number of winnings made exceeds the prescribed number of winnings in the round, the counting of the individual period winning numbers by the individual period counter is stopped for the larger number of winnings. As a result, even when the number of winnings counted during one round becomes larger than the prescribed number of winnings in the round, counting by the counter during the individual period is stopped for the larger number of winnings. Thus, it is possible to prevent the notification that the specific big hit gaming state is continued even though the displayed number of winnings has reached the expected winning number. Therefore, when a notification that the specific big hit gaming state is continued is made, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with respect to the relationship between the notified expected winning number and the displayed winning number. In this way, by making the player not feel uncomfortable with respect to the performance in the specific jackpot gaming state, it is possible to prevent the player from being distrusted with respect to the performance in the jackpot gaming state.

  (8) As shown in ST10e to ST10h, when the number of winnings counted during one round is larger than the prescribed number of winnings in the round, the number of winnings is the same as the number of winnings in the next round of that round. Since the counting of the number of winnings for the individual period by the counter is stopped, the number of winnings counted during one round is larger than the prescribed number of winnings for the round, and the counting by the counter during the individual period is stopped. The relationship can be made difficult for the player to notice.

  (9) As shown in FIG. 8 to FIG. 11, the notification that the specific big hit gaming state is continued is performed during the period between rounds or during the period by selecting the bonus continuation pattern. Whether or not is selected and the notification is given in any of the selected periods, it is possible to enrich the variation of the production and improve the interest of the player.

  (10) For example, in the round lottery data in FIG. When 7 or the like is selected, the bonus continuation effect display may be performed during the round, as indicated by the fact that a value that is not a multiple of the prescribed winning number of one round such as “22” is notified. When selected, a value that is not a multiple of the prescribed number of winnings in one round is notified as the expected number of winnings, so that the expected number of winnings corresponding to notification during the round can be notified.

(11) For example, the pattern No. Once a value that does not become a multiple of the specified number of winnings for one round is notified, such as 7, 8, 10, 11, 13, or 14, a value that does not become a multiple of the specified number of winnings for one round in the next divided period. As shown to be notified, when a value that is not a multiple of the specified number of winnings in one round is selected as the expected number of winnings to be notified, a value that is not a multiple of the specified number of winnings is notified next. The selection pattern is set so that the ratio selected in the above is higher than the ratio not selected as a value that is not a multiple of the prescribed winning number. As a result, when a value that is not a multiple of the prescribed number of winnings in one round is notified as the expected number of winnings, a value that is not a multiple of the prescribed number of winnings is likely to be continuously notified a plurality of times as the expected winning number. Also, when a value that is not a multiple of the prescribed number of winnings in one round is first notified as the expected number of winnings, the player can easily confirm that the notified expected winning number does not correspond to the value at the end of the round. Since it can be recognized, the player can easily grasp that the specific jackpot gaming state continues. However, for example, pattern no. When a value that is not a multiple of the specified number of winnings in one round is continuously reported multiple times as shown in FIG. 7, the player determines whether the total value of the expected winning numbers is a multiple of the specified number of winnings in one round. Is difficult to recognize, so it is difficult for the player to grasp whether or not the specific big hit gaming state continues. Further, the pattern No. of FIG. When a value that is not a multiple of the prescribed number of winnings in one round, such as 7, 8, 10, 11, 13, or 14, is notified multiple times as the expected number of winnings, the total value of the expected winning numbers to be notified is specified in one round. Since it is possible to adjust to a multiple of the number of winnings, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with respect to the relationship between the notified expected winning number and the actual number of winnings.

  (12) As shown in FIG. 18 of the first embodiment, in the specific jackpot gaming state, the continuous delay control is performed, so that the expected number of winnings notified during the execution of the bonus start effect display or the bonus continuous effect display is obtained. At the end of the corresponding round, when the number of individual period winnings counted by the individual period counter is less than the notified expected number of winnings, the number of individual period winnings counted by the individual period counter is the expected number of winnings Until that time, the notification that the specific big hit gaming state is continued is delayed, and the small number of winnings is subtracted from the expected number of winnings notified in the bonus continuous effect display for the next individual period. As a result, when the number of individual-period winnings counted in one round is less than the prescribed number of winnings, the bonus continuation effect display is delayed until the individual-period winning number reaches the expected number of winnings. It is possible to prevent continuous notification by the bonus continuous effect display in a state where the expected number has not been reached. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with respect to the relationship between the number of winning prizes and the notification that the specific jackpot gaming state continues. Furthermore, when the bonus continuation effect display is delayed because the number of winnings in the individual period is less than the prescribed number of winnings in this way, the winning is notified in the bonus continuation effect display for the next individual period by the smaller number of winnings. Since it is subtracted from the expected number, the expected number of winnings notified in the next individual period can be matched with the number that can be won in the next individual period. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with respect to the relationship between the notified expected winning number and the actual number that can be won. In this way, by making the player not feel uncomfortable with respect to the performance in the specific jackpot gaming state, it is possible to prevent the player from being distrusted with respect to the performance in the jackpot gaming state.

(13) As shown in FIG. 61 of the seventh embodiment, in the specific big hit gaming state, counting is performed during one round during execution of the bonus start effect display and the bonus continuation effect display by performing count doubling control. When the number of winnings made is less than the prescribed number of winnings in the round, the plurality of individual period winning number counting values by the individual period counter are added to one detected game ball, The count value is increased by the smaller number of winnings. As a result, even when the number of winnings counted during one round is less than the prescribed number of winnings in the round, the number of individual winnings by the individual period counter for one game ball is reduced by the smaller number of winnings. Since a plurality of count values are updated, it is possible to prevent the continuous notification by the bonus continuous effect display from being performed in a state where the number of winnings in the individual period has not reached the expected number of winnings. Therefore, when a notification that the specific big hit gaming state is continued is made, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with respect to the relationship between the notified expected winning number and the displayed winning number. In this way, by making the player not feel uncomfortable with respect to the performance in the specific jackpot gaming state, it is possible to prevent the player from being distrusted with respect to the performance in the jackpot gaming state.

  Next, a modified example of the decorative symbol variation display performed on the effect display device 44b of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

  FIG. 65 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1a according to a modification. FIG. 66 is a front view of the game board 40 of the pachinko gaming machine 1a according to the modification. FIG. 67 is a perspective view of the decorative member 200 provided around the effect display device 44b of the pachinko gaming machine 1a according to the modification. 65 to 67, components having the same functions as those in FIG. 1 are denoted by common reference numerals, and redundant description will not be repeated.

  The characteristic structure of the pachinko gaming machine 1a according to the modification is as follows. A decorative member 200 shaped like a train is provided around the effect display device 44b. On the left side of the decorative member 200, a breaker member 201 that is a movable member shaped like a crossing breaker is provided in a swingable manner. The circuit breaker member 201 can operate in such a manner as to fall down to the front side of the display area 80. In the decorative member 200, a leaf type display unit 202 that displays various information such as a gaming state is provided above the display area 80. In the decorative member 200, below the display area 80, a member for temporarily taking the game ball guided to the decorative member 200 into the decorative member 200, and an intake member 203 having a ring shape. And a discharge port 204 for discharging the game ball taken in by the take-in member 203 to the upper side of the normal variable winning ball device 58. In addition, a plurality of decorative lamps 205 are provided on the upper side and the lower side of the game area 41 to indicate train station names (place names). An operation button 206 that can be operated by the player is provided at a predetermined position on the upper plate 19.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 68 to 84, an image that is displayed when a decorative symbol is variably displayed on the effect display device 44b of the pachinko gaming machine 1a according to the modification will be described. In each figure shown below, for the display areas (left display area 301, middle display area 302, and right display area 303), the downward arrows indicate that the symbols change from top to bottom, and are directed to the left and right. The arrow indicates that the symbol swings in the left-right direction.

  FIG. 68 shows images displayed in a variation pattern called normal variation in (a1) to (a4), and images displayed in a variation pattern called normal per 11 frames in (a11) to (a14). It is a display screen figure.

  In the normal variation, the variation display of the symbols is started in the left display area 301, the middle display area 302, and the right display area 303 by using (a1) the scenery (suburb) seen from the driver's seat 211 of the train as a background image. Then, the symbol is stopped in the left display region 301 by (a2), the symbol is stopped in the right display region 303 by (a3), and finally the symbol is stopped in the middle display region 302 by (a4). In this example, as shown in (a4), an outlier display result is derived and displayed.

In normal 11 frames, by (a11), with the scenery (suburbs) seen from the driver's seat 211 of the train as a background image, variable display of symbols is started in the left display area 301, the middle display area 302, and the right display area 303. An image in which the crow 304 flies is displayed as a notice image for making a notice that a big hit will occur. Then, the symbol is stopped in the left display region 301 by (a12), the symbol is stopped in the right display region 303 by (a13), and the variation speed of the symbol is decreased in the middle display region 302, and the symbol is displayed at low speed. To be in a state to do. Finally, the symbol is stopped in the middle display area 302 by (a14). In this example, as shown in (a14), the jackpot display result is derived and displayed because the symbols of “7” are aligned in the diagonally effective line, and the three symbols constituting the jackpot display result move greatly. Display (display swinging from side to side) is performed.

  FIG. 69 is a display screen diagram showing images (b1) to (b7) displayed in a variation pattern called per tunnel development long.

  At the long tunnel development long, by (b1), with the scenery (suburbs) seen from the driver's seat 211 of the train as a background image, the variable display of the symbols is started in the left display area 301, the middle display area 302, and the right display area 303. When the express train 305 overtakes the train on the left-hand route, a notice image for giving a notice of a big hit is displayed. Then, the symbol is stopped in the left display region 301 by (b2), and the symbol is stopped in the right display region 303 by (b3), so that the state of the reach display mode is set by the symbol “5”. Then, by (b4), an image of the train entering the tunnel is displayed, so that the player is notified that the reach display mode will be developed into super reach. Next, according to (b5), the scenery seen from the driver's seat of the train running in the tunnel is displayed as a background image. Then, according to (b6), the scenery seen from the driver's seat of the train running along the sea through the tunnel is displayed as a background image, and the variation speed of the symbol is reduced in the middle display area 302 and is displayed at a low speed. Put into a state. Finally, the symbol is stopped in the middle display area 302 by (b7). In this example, as shown in (b7), the jackpot display result obtained by having the symbols “5” aligned on the horizontal effective line is derived and displayed, and the three symbols constituting the jackpot display result move greatly. Display (display swinging from side to side) is performed.

  FIG. 70 is a display screen diagram showing images (c1) to (c10) displayed in a variation pattern called “after tunnel development SP long”.

  At the end of the long tunnel development SP, the change display of the symbols is started in the left display area 301, the middle display area 302, and the right display area 303 by using (c1) the scenery (suburb) seen from the driver's seat 211 of the train as a background image. Is done. In (c1), the airplane 306 flies, and a predetermined announcement on the premises is displayed in a balloon, and is also output by voice, thereby giving a big hit notice. And a symbol is stopped in the left display area 301 by (c2). Further, in (c2), a notice that a big hit is given by displaying an image in which the circuit breaker member 201 operates with a warning sound of a crossing and descends in front of the display area 80 and the train 307 passes from right to left. Done. In addition, although the example which displays the train 307 by the image was shown here, not only this but the train may be comprised by a movable member.

  And by (c3), after the train 307 passes, the circuit breaker member 201 returns to the original position, and the symbol is stopped in the right display area 303. Here, according to (c3), the state is set to the reach display mode (called double reach) with the symbols “4” and “5” in the two effective lines in the oblique direction. Then, by (c4), an image of the train entering the tunnel is displayed, so that the player is informed that the reach display mode will be developed into super reach. Next, according to (c5), the scenery seen from the driver's seat of the train running in the tunnel is displayed as a background image. And by (c6), the scenery seen from the driver's seat of the train which runs along the sea through the tunnel is displayed as a background image.

Next, according to (c7), the variation speed of the symbol is reduced in the middle display area 302, and the display is varied at a low speed. Then, according to (c8), a raining background image is displayed as an image that improves the player's expectation for the big hit when displayed, and the variation speed of the symbol increases in the middle display area 302. Then, the display is changed to a high speed display. And (c
9), the symbol changing speed again decreases in the middle display area 302, and the display is changed to a low speed changing state. Finally, the symbol is stopped in the middle display area 302 by (c10). In this example, as shown in (c10), the jackpot display result is obtained by deriving and displaying the symbol “5” in one effective line in the oblique direction, and the three symbols constituting the jackpot display result are displayed. Is displayed (moving left and right).

  71 and 72 are display screen diagrams showing images (d1) to (d17) that are displayed in a variation pattern called per two steps of tunnel development station valve.

  At the second level of the tunnel development station valve, (d1), the display of changes in the symbols is started in the left display area 301, the middle display area 302, and the right display area 303 with the scenery (suburbs) seen from the driver's seat 211 of the train as the background image. Then, a predetermined announcement on the premises is displayed in a balloon and is also output by voice, so that a big hit is announced. Then, according to (d2), the circuit breaker member 201 is operated with a warning sound of a crossing and descends to the front of the display area 80, and an image of the train 307a passing from left to right is displayed, thereby giving a big hit notice. It is. Here, an example in which the train 307a is displayed as an image is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the train may be configured by a movable member. Further, the circuit breaker member 201 moves from the vertical position (upward position) through the dotted line position in the figure in the direction of the arcuate arrow in the figure, and stops at the horizontal position (lateral position).

  Then, the symbol is stopped in the left display area 301 after the train 307 passes by (d3). Further, the symbol is stopped in the right display area 303 by (d4). Here, according to (d4), the state of the reach display mode is set with the symbol “7” in the effective line in the horizontal direction. Then, by (d5), the circuit breaker member 201 moves in the direction of the arcuate arrow in the figure and returns to the original position. Then, by displaying an image of the train entering the tunnel in (d6), the player is notified that the reach display mode will be developed into super reach. Next, by (d7), the scenery seen from the driver's seat of the train running in the tunnel is displayed as a background image. After (d8), after passing through the tunnel, an image of the girl 308 waving from the train window is displayed. By (d9), the image of the girl 308 calling the lunchbox from the train window parked at the home. Is displayed. Then, by (d10), as soon as the lunch box 309 comes to the home, an image is displayed that causes the train to depart.

  Then, by (d11), an image in which the lunch box 309 follows the girl 308 is displayed. In (d11), an image is also displayed in which a bent display is pasted on the lunch box held by the lunch box 309 by rotating in the middle display area 302. Then, by (d12), the lunch box 309 rolls over and an image is displayed in the middle display area 302 where the symbol once stops at “6”. Next, the lunchbox 309 puts on the hat again by (d13), and the image of the lunchbox 309 chasing the girl 308 again is displayed by (d14). In (d14), an image is also displayed in which the symbol of the middle display area 302 affixed to the lunch box starts changing display again.

  Then, after (d15), an image in which the lunch box 309 catches up with the girl 308 is displayed, and in (d16), the rotating display is performed in the middle display area 302, and the symbol in the variable display is enlarged and displayed. ”Or“ 7 ”, an image indicating a state of being stopped is displayed. Lastly, a jackpot display result obtained by arranging the symbols “7” in the diagonally active line is derived and displayed, and an image of the girl 308 receiving the lunch box is displayed.

  FIG. 73 is a display screen diagram showing images (e1) to (e11) that are displayed in a variation pattern called a level crossing development stoppage stop.

At the level crossing development stop, according to (e1), the change display of the symbols is started in the left display area 301, the middle display area 302, and the right display area 303 with the scenery (residential area) seen from the driver's seat 211 of the train as a background image. The In (e1), the bell 310 is displayed, and the sound of the bell is also output by voice, so that a big hit is announced. Then, according to (e2), the symbol stop in the left display area 301 and the symbol stop in the right display area 303 are performed at the same time, and the state of the reach display mode is set with the symbol “6”. Further, according to (e3), the circuit breaker member 201 operates together with a warning sound of a crossing and descends to the front of the display area 80, so that a big hit is announced.

  Thereafter, display of an image passing from right to left is started in a display mode in which the train 311 is full on the screen by (e4), and when the train 311 covers the full screen, (e5) is displayed on the lower right side of the screen. The left display area 301, the middle display area 302, and the right display area 303 are reduced and displayed. Here, an example in which the train 311 is displayed as an image is shown, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and the train may be configured by a movable member. Next, according to (e6), after the train 311 passes, the circuit breaker member 201 returns to the original position, and the station platform is displayed as a background image. Then, by (e7), an image is displayed in which the express train 312 enters the home and scoops the symbols placed on the track. Next, the driver 313 appears by (e8), and the image for stopping the express train 312 by performing the brake operation is displayed. As a result, the symbol ("6") that was not beaten by (e9) is displayed in the middle. It is displayed as a stop symbol of the area 302. As a result, the jackpot display result with the symbol “6” is temporarily displayed, and immediately after that, an image in which light is emitted from the center of the screen is displayed by (e10), and “7” is displayed in the horizontal effective line by (e11). The jackpot display result due to the arrangement of symbols is derived and displayed, and a table in which the three symbols constituting the jackpot display result move greatly (display swinging to the left and right) is displayed.

  FIG. 74 and FIG. 75 are display screen diagrams showing images (f1) to (f20) displayed in a variation pattern called “post-pseudo × 2 tunnel after the last development of the tunnel”.

  At the end of the last train of pseudo-ream × 2 tunnel development, the scene (building street) seen from the driver's seat 211 of the train is used as a background image by (f1), and the pattern is displayed in the left display area 301, the middle display area 302, and the right display area 303. Fluctuation display is started. And in (f1), the circuit breaker member 201 operates with a warning sound of a crossing and descends to the front of the display area 80, and the announcement of the station staff is displayed in a balloon and output by voice, so that A notice will be made. Then, by (f2), an image passing from right to left is displayed in a display mode in which the train 314 fills the screen. Although an example in which the train 314 is displayed as an image is shown here, the present invention is not limited to this, and the train may be configured by a movable member.

  Then, after the symbol is stopped in the left display region 301 by (f3), the symbol is stopped in the right display region 303 by (f4). Then, the symbol is stopped in the middle display area 302 by (f5), and the display result of the detachment is once derived and displayed. In (f5), an image passing from left to right is further displayed in a display mode in which the train 315 fills the screen. Although an example in which the train 315 is displayed as an image is shown here, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the train may be configured by a movable member. Then, after the train 315 has passed, the variable display of the symbols is started again in the left display area 301, the middle display area 302, and the right display area 303 by (f6).

Then, the symbol is stopped in the left display region 301 by (f7), the symbol is stopped in the right display region 303 by (f8), and the symbol is stopped in the middle display region 302 by (f9). Is once derived and displayed. Thereafter, (f10) displays an image passing from right to left in a display mode in which the express train 316 fills the screen. Although an example in which the express train 316 is displayed as an image is shown here, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the train may be configured by a movable member. Then, after the express train 316 passes, after (f11), the symbol display is started again in the left display region 301, the middle display region 302, and the right display region 303, and then the symbol is stopped in the left display region 301. Is done.

  Then, the symbols are stopped in the right display area 303 by (f12), so that the reach display mode is obtained with the symbols “6” and “7” in the two effective lines in the diagonal direction. Further, at (f12), the symbol changing speed is reduced in the middle display area 302, and the display is changed at a low speed. Next, by displaying an image of the train entering the tunnel in (f13), the player is notified that the reach display mode will be developed into super reach. Next, by (f14), the scenery seen from the driver's seat of the train running in the tunnel is displayed as a background image. Then, (f15) displays an image of the train running in the countryside at night after passing through the tunnel, and (f16) displays the train as an image that improves the player's expectation for the big hit when displayed. An image of fireflies flying across the river is displayed across the bridge.

  And by (f17), the train approaches the platform of the countryside station, and the image from which the light can be seen is displayed. Thereafter, an image in which the station clerk 317 turns the light and sends a sign by the light is displayed by (f18). Next, after the symbol (“6”) variably displayed in the middle display area 302 is enlarged from the light rotating by the light by (f19), the symbol is updated by (f20), and the symbol “7” is updated. The jackpot display result by design is derived and displayed.

  FIG. 76 is a display screen diagram showing images (g1) to (g12) displayed in a variation pattern called “after tunnel development MUSIC”.

  At the end of the tunnel development MUSIC, by (g1), the change display of the symbols is started in the left display area 301, the middle display area 302, and the right display area 303 with the scenery (suburbs) seen from the driver's seat 211 of the train as a background image. The Further, in (g1), the circuit breaker member 201 operates with a warning sound of a crossing and descends to the front of the display area 80, and the voice of the station staff is displayed in a balloon and is output by voice. A notice will be made. In (g2), an image in which the train 318 passes from left to right is displayed. Although an example in which the train 318 is displayed as an image is shown here, the present invention is not limited to this, and the train may be configured by a movable member. After the train 318 passes, the symbols are stopped in the left display area 301 and the right display area 303 by (g3), and the reach display mode is displayed with the symbols “6” and “7” in the two effective lines in the diagonal direction. It will be in the state. In (g3), an advance notice is given by displaying an image of the train 319 passing from right to left. Although an example in which the train 319 is displayed as an image is shown here, the present invention is not limited to this, and the train 319 may be configured by a movable member.

  Then, according to (g4), after the train 319 passes, the circuit breaker member 201 returns to its original position, and the variation speed of the symbol is reduced in the middle display area 302, and the display is varied at a low speed. Next, an image of the train entering the tunnel is displayed according to (g5), thereby informing the player that the reach display mode will be developed into super reach. Next, according to (g6), the scenery seen from the driver's seat of the train running in the tunnel is displayed as a background image. Then, according to (g7), after passing through the tunnel, an image of the train running in the countryside is displayed, and sound output of a predetermined piece of music is started. Then, by (g8), the symbols that are variably displayed in the middle display area 302 are sequentially displayed in the center of the screen in accordance with the rhythm of the music, and the left and right stop symbols are displayed at the center of the screen by (g9). An image that presses the middle symbol is displayed. Then, an image in which the background image rotates in a spiral shape is displayed by (g10).

  Next, by (g11), the symbol “7” shines and stops in the middle display area 302, and the jackpot display result due to the fact that the symbol “7” is aligned on the diagonal effective line is derived and displayed ( By g12), a display in which the three symbols constituting the jackpot display result move greatly (display that swings left and right) is performed.

  77 and 78 are display screen diagrams showing images (h1) to (h23) displayed in a variation pattern called “after tunnel development MUSIC”.

  At the end of the tunnel development MUSIC, (h1) starts changing the display of symbols in the left display area 301, the middle display area 302, and the right display area 303 with the scenery (suburbs) seen from the driver's seat 211 of the train as the background image. The And by (h2), a symbol stops in the left display area 301 and the right display area 303, and it will be in the state which became the reach display mode by the symbol of "7" in one effective line of a horizontal direction. Furthermore, by (h3), while the plurality of characters 320 appear from the right to the left, the variation speed of the symbol is reduced in the middle display area 302, and the display is variably displayed at a low speed.

  Next, the image that the train enters the tunnel is displayed by (h4), so that the player is notified that the reach display mode is developed to super reach. Next, by (h5), the scenery seen from the driver's seat of the train running in the tunnel is displayed as a background image. Then, according to (h6), after passing through the tunnel, an image of the train running in the countryside is displayed, and sound output of a predetermined piece of music is started. In (h6), the left display area 301, the middle display area 302, and the right display area 303 are reduced and displayed at the lower right of the screen.

  Then, by (h7) to (h23), in the state where the snow scene is displayed as the background image, an effect of displaying the jackpot symbol in various display patterns according to the rhythm of the music is performed. By (h7), the image ("111") that is the jackpot display result from the center of the screen is sequentially enlarged and displayed, and the outgoing image is displayed. By (h8), an image is displayed in which the symbol (“111”) that is the jackpot display result spirally appears from the center of the screen. As a result of (h9), an image is displayed in which a symbol (“111”) that is a big hit display result is drawn by drawing a curve from the upper right part of the screen. By (h10), an image in which a curve (“111”) that results in a jackpot display is drawn by drawing a curve from the upper left of the screen is displayed. By (h11), an image in which a symbol that is a jackpot display result appears in a manner of sliding from the upper right part of the screen to the upper left part is displayed. In (h11), the position before the movement of the symbol is indicated by a dotted line, and the moving direction of the symbol is indicated by an arrow. Similarly, in the following (h12) to (h22), the position before the symbol is moved is indicated by a dotted line, and the moving direction of the symbol is indicated by an arrow.

  Due to (h12), the symbol (“111”) resulting in the jackpot display moves from the upper center of the screen to the left and disappears, and another symbol (“333”) resulting in the jackpot display results simultaneously from the lower left corner of the screen. Slide to the right. As a result of (h13), the symbol (“333”) that is the jackpot display result moves from the lower center of the screen to the right side and disappears. Due to (h14), another symbol (“555”) that is the jackpot display result slides from the upper center of the screen to the center of the screen. Due to (h15), the symbol ("555") resulting in the jackpot display result slides from the center of the screen to the lower center of the screen and disappears. Due to (h16), another symbol (“777”) that is the jackpot display result slides from the lower center of the screen to the central portion of the screen. Due to (h17), the symbol ("777") resulting in the jackpot display slides from the center of the screen to the upper center of the screen and disappears.

  As a result of (h18), the symbol ("111") that results in the jackpot display slides from the upper left portion of the screen to the central portion of the screen. As a result of (h19), the symbol (“111”) that is the jackpot display result slides from the center of the screen to the lower right portion of the screen and disappears. As a result of (h20), the symbol ("555") resulting in the jackpot display slides from the upper right part of the screen to the center part of the screen. Due to (h21), the symbol ("555") resulting in the jackpot display result slides from the center of the screen to the lower left portion of the screen and disappears. After (h22) and (h23), the symbol (“777”) that is the big hit display result is enlarged and displayed, and then the enlarged state is released and collected in the center.

  FIG. 79 shows images ((i1) to (i6)) displayed in a variation pattern called hypersgoroku mode entry variation via a crossing after the start of variation and images ((i11) displayed in a variation pattern called hypersgoroku mode normal variation. It is the display screen figure which showed ()-(i13)).

  In the hyper sgoroku mode entry change via the crossing after the start of the change, the view (suburb) seen from the driver's seat 211 of the train is set as a background image by (i1), and the pattern of the left display area 301, the middle display area 302, and the right display area 303 Fluctuation display is started. Then, according to (i2), the circuit breaker member 201 operates with a warning sound of a crossing and descends to the front of the display area 80, so that a big hit is announced.

  Thereafter, (i3) starts displaying an image that passes from right to left in a display mode in which the train 321 fills the screen. With (i4), when the train 311 covers the left display area 301, the middle display area 302, and the right display area 303, the left display area 301, the middle display area 302, and the right display area 303 are reduced in the lower right portion of the screen. Displayed. Here, although the example which displays the train 321 with the image was shown, not only this but the train 321 may be comprised with a movable member. In (i4), after the train 311 passes, the circuit breaker member 201 returns to the original position. Thereafter, an image for notifying that the presentation mode is called hyper hyper mode is displayed by (i5). In the hyper-slow mode, an image that produces an effect of deriving and displaying the display result of the variable display is displayed after a super-sized mini game is played. Then, by (i6), an image of the initial screen when the hyper-slow mode is set is displayed. In the initial screen when the hyper-slow mode is set, the left display area 301, the middle display area 302, and the right display area 303 are reduced and displayed at the lower right of the screen.

  In the normal fluctuation variation of the hyperslag mode, the image of the initial screen when the hypersgoroku mode is set is displayed by (i11), and the image in which the dice 322 starts rotating is displayed. Then, (i12) stops the dice 322, and (i13) causes the piece 323, which looks like a train, to advance on the square according to the number indicated by the stopped dice 322. For example, “disconnect” is displayed. An image that stops at the displayed square is displayed.

  FIG. 80 is a display screen diagram showing images (j1) to (j10) that are displayed in a variation pattern called “per hyper opportunity mode branch chance tug of war”.

  In the hypersugoku mode chance mass branch tug-of-war chance, the image of the initial screen when the hypersugoku mode is entered is displayed by (j1), and the image in which the dice 322 starts rotating is displayed. Further, in (j1), a notice of a big hit is given by displaying an image of the airplane 300 flying. According to (j2), the dice 322 stops, and according to the number indicated by the stopped dice 322 according to (j3), the piece 323 advances through the squares and stops at the square where “chance” is displayed. Is displayed.

Then, by (j4), an image indicating a message for guiding the notice of a big hit is displayed on the leaf-type display unit 20. Then, by (j5), an image informing that a plurality of characters 324 and 325 will enter a production mode called a tug-of-war chance to play a tug of war is displayed, and in the left display area 301 and the right display area 303 When the symbol is stopped, the state of the reach display mode is set for the symbol “7”. In (j5), a train 326 further appears, and an image that advances from the lower right corner of the screen to the lower middle portion of the screen is displayed. Although an example in which the train 326 is displayed as an image is shown here, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the train may be configured by a movable member.

  Then, an image in which the characters 324 and 325 conduct a tug of war is displayed by (j6) to (j9). When such a tug of war is performed, as shown in (j8), an image is displayed in which the train 326 moves left and right like a meter indicating the degree to which the tug is being pulled. In (j10), an image indicating that the character 324 representing the station employee has won is displayed, and the jackpot display result obtained by having the symbol “7” is derived and displayed. At that time, an image is displayed in which the train 326 moves leftward and disappears.

  FIG. 81 is a display screen diagram showing images (k1) to (k14) displayed in a variation pattern called hypersgoroku mode chance mass branching archipelago crossing chance per chance.

  For each chance of crossing the hypersgoroku mode chance mass branch archipelago, the image of the initial screen when the hypersgoroku mode is entered is displayed by (k1), and the image where the dice 322 starts rotating is displayed. According to (k2), the dice 322 is stopped, and according to the number indicated by the stopped dice 322 according to (k3), the piece 323 advances through the squares and stops at the square where “chance” is displayed. Is displayed.

  Then, by (k4), an image showing a message for guiding the notice of a big hit is displayed on the leaf type display unit 20. Then, by (k5), an image informing that the player enters the production mode of the archipelago crossing chance to play the mini game using the roulette is displayed, and the symbols are stopped in the left display area 301 and the right display area 303. Thus, the state of the reach display mode is set with the symbol “1”.

  Then, by (k6), an image showing the initial screen of the archipelago crossing chance displayed with a route map connecting a plurality of station names is displayed, and when the train has advanced by the number of roulettes and reaches the final destination station An image showing a message for guiding the effect of winning a big hit is displayed. The station names shown in such a route map are shown in the same arrangement as the station names shown on the decorative lamp 205. Then, an image indicating that there are two chances to turn the roulette is displayed by (k7), and the roulette 327 is enlarged and displayed by (k8).

  Then, the rotation of the first roulette 327 is started by (k9), the rotation of the first roulette 327 is stopped by (k10), and an image indicating that the user is prompted to view the decoration lamp 205 is displayed. In the production mode of the archipelago crossing chance, the number of stations to the final destination station is displayed while the roulette 327 is being displayed since the first rotation of the roulette 327 is started. Next, according to (k11), according to the first rotation result of the roulette 327, the name of the advanced station is displayed and an image indicating that the second rotation of the roulette 327 is performed is displayed. The rotation of the second roulette 327 is started by (k12), the rotation of the second roulette 327 is stopped by (k13), and the advanced station name is indicated according to the rotation result of the second roulette 327. Further, at (k13), an image indicating that the user is prompted to view the decorative lamp 205 is displayed. Then, by (k14), an image indicating that the final destination is reached at the crossing archipelago chance and the jackpot display result is obtained is displayed.

  FIG. 82 is a display screen diagram showing (m1) to (m15) images displayed in a variation pattern called per hypersgoroku mode chance mass branch archipelago crossing chance button.

In the hypersugoku mode chance mass branch archipelago crossing chance button, images similar to the images shown in (k1) to (k11) of FIG. 81 are displayed by (m1) to (m11), thereby A mini game using the roulette 327 is performed. Then, before the second rotation of the roulette 327 is started, an image indicating that the player is prompted to stop the roulette 327 by pressing the operation button 206 is displayed by (m12). Then, the second rotation of the roulette 327 is started by (m13). The second rotation of the roulette 327 is stopped when the player presses the operation button 206 or when a predetermined time elapses without the player pressing the operation button 206. Then, the same images as (k13) and (k14) are displayed by (m14) and (m15), indicating that the final destination was reached at the crossing archipelago chance and the jackpot display result was obtained.

  FIG. 83 shows an image ((n1) to (n15)) displayed with a variation pattern called per hyper-sgoroku mode chance mass electricity GO chance, and an image displayed with a variation pattern called per mass stop per hyper-sgoroku mode probability variation. It is the display screen figure which showed ((n21)-(n22)).

  In the hyper square mode chance mass electricity GO chance, images similar to the images shown in (k1) to (k4) of FIG. 81 are displayed by (n1) to (n4). Then, by (n5), the scenery (building street) that can be seen from the driver's seat 211 of the train is displayed, and the symbols are stopped in the left display area 301 and the right display area 303, thereby reaching the “5” symbol. The display mode is set.

  Then, by (n6), an image indicating that the player presses the operation button 206 to prompt the user to brake the train is displayed. Next, a speedometer 328, a button indicator 329, and a brake level meter 330 are displayed at a position visible from the driver's seat 211 of the train. The speedometer 328 is a meter indicating the speed of the train. The button display 329 is an image showing the operation of the operation button 206. The brake level meter 330 is a meter indicating the level of brake strength.

  Then, by (n8), an image of the train 331 entering the station platform from the left side is displayed, and an image indicating that a big hit is displayed if the train stops at the position indicated by the hatched line. At this time, if the player operates the operation button 206, the train 331 can be stopped. Then, an image in which the train 331 is decelerated is displayed by (n9). After that, an image in which the train 331 stops at the position indicated by the oblique line is displayed by (n10), and the jackpot display result due to the arrangement of the symbols “5” is derived and displayed.

  In the hyper square mode probability variation per mass stop, an image of the initial screen when the hyper square mode is entered is displayed by (n21), and an image in which the dice 322 starts rotating is displayed. Then, by (n22), the dice 322 stops in a mode in which the character “T” is displayed, the piece 323 flies, moves to a specific square where “FEVER” is displayed on the last square, and stops. The image is displayed, and the jackpot display result obtained by having the symbols “7” aligned is derived and displayed.

  FIG. 84 shows images ((p1) to (p9)) displayed in a variation pattern called per hypersugoro mode chance mass branch roulette chance, and images displayed in a variation pattern called per hypersgoroku mode chance mass branch FEVER. It is the display screen figure which showed ((p11)-(p15)).

In the hyper-sugolo mode chance mass branch roulette chance, the image of the initial screen when the hyper-sugolo mode is entered is displayed by (p1), and the image in which the dice 322 starts rotating is displayed. Further, in (p1), a notice of a big hit is given by displaying an image of the airplane 332 flying. Then, the dice 322 is stopped by (p2), and an image in which the piece 323 advances through the squares according to the number indicated by the stopped dice 322 is displayed, and the squares displayed as “lost” by (p3). The image that stops at is displayed.

  Next, at (p4), the circuit breaker member 201 operates with a warning sound of a crossing and descends to the front of the display area 80, thereby giving a big hit notice. Further, at (p4), display of an image passing from right to left is started in a display mode in which the train 333 is full of the screen. Although the example which displays the train 333 with the image was shown, it is not restricted to this, You may comprise the train by a movable member. By (p5), after the train 333 passes, the imager informing that the circuit breaker member 201 returns to the original position and enters the effect mode called the roulette chance to play the mini game using the roulette is displayed.

  Then, by (p6), a roulette board in which a plurality of hit areas indicated by the letters “FEVER” and a plurality of disengagement areas indicated by the letters “Zanen” are alternately arranged, An image showing the mini-train 334 that makes a circling action is displayed. By (p7), an image indicating that a mini game using roulette is started is displayed. Then, (p8) displays an image in which a lamp image 335 showing a lamp that has lit the area on the roulette plate is displayed, and then (p9) displays a lamp image in the hit area where the letters “FEVER” are indicated. 335 is stopped, and an image indicating that the jackpot display result is obtained is displayed.

  In the hyper square mode chance mass branch FEVER, an image of the initial screen when the hyper square mode is entered is displayed by (p11), and an image in which the dice 322 starts rotating is displayed. Then, according to (p12), the dice 322 is stopped, and according to the number indicated by the stopped dice 322, an image in which the piece 323 advances through the square is displayed, and the square where “chance” is displayed according to (p13). The image that stops at is displayed.

  Next, at (p14), an image showing a message for notifying that a big hit will be announced is displayed on the leaf-type display unit 20, and a jackpot display result due to the arrangement of the symbol “7” is derived. Is displayed. At that time, the display unit 20 displays the character “FEVER”, thereby displaying that it is determined that a big hit will be made. Then, after an image of a predetermined character is displayed, an image indicating that the jackpot display result is obtained is displayed by displaying a character “FEVER”.

Next, modifications and feature points of the embodiment described above are listed below.
(1) In the fourth embodiment and the fifth embodiment described above, the example of performing the winning expectation increase control is shown. And in 4th Embodiment and 5th Embodiment, when performing the above winning expectation number increase change control as mentioned above, the example which performs round midway continuation control was shown. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and when performing the expected number-of-wins increase change control, instead of performing the mid-round continuation control, the notification extension control shown in the second embodiment, the display change control shown in the third embodiment, Or you may make it perform the count limiting control shown in 6th Embodiment.

  (2) In the fifth embodiment, the example in which the continuous delay control is performed when the winning expectation increase control is changed as described above. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when performing the expected expected number increase change control, the count doubling control shown in the seventh embodiment may be performed instead of the continuous delay control.

(3) In the embodiment described above, the special symbol display device 44a is replaced with a 7-segment LE.
Although it is composed of a D display, it is not particularly limited to this, and an LCD (Liquid Crystal)
It is also possible to configure a display by a display (CRT) (Cathode Ray Tube), VFD (Vacuum Fluorescent Display), EL (Electro Luminescence), or PDP (Plasma Display Panel), a drum type or a reel type.

  (4) In the above-described embodiment, a plurality of variable display devices including a special symbol display device 44a that displays a special symbol in a variable manner and an effect display device 44b that displays the decorative symbol in a variable manner are provided as a display device that displays the symbol. The pachinko machine 1 explained. However, the pachinko gaming machine in which the control as described above is performed includes only a special symbol display device that displays a special symbol as a display device that displays the symbol, and the effect display device 44b does not display the decorative symbol in a variable manner. In addition, only the effect display other than the symbol variation display such as the bonus effect described above may be performed. As a pachinko gaming machine in which the control as described above is performed, as a display device for displaying a symbol, it is possible to perform a special symbol variation display and an effect display other than the symbol variation display such as the bonus effect described above. Only a special symbol display device composed of an image display device (for example, a liquid crystal display device) is provided, and the special symbol display device performs both the variation display of the symbol and the effect display other than the symbol variation display such as the bonus effect described above. You may make it perform.

  (5) In each of the first embodiment, the second embodiment, the third embodiment, the fifth embodiment, and the sixth embodiment described above, an example in which continuous delay control is performed has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the continuous delay control may not be performed in these embodiments.

  (6) In each of the above-described embodiments, an example in which a counter during round is used as a counter that counts the number of winning balls in one round has been shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the individual period counter described above may be used as a counter for counting the number of winning balls in one round. That is, the number of winnings counted by the individual period counter can be confirmed between the reception of the round start command and the reception of the round ending command, that is, during one round. The number of winning balls inside may be used for control.

  (7) Regarding the count limit control described in the sixth embodiment, when the number of winnings in a certain round exceeds the specified number of winnings in one round during the individual period, the number of specified winnings in the next round It was shown that the control for limiting the counting of the number of winnings by the counter during the individual period (specifically, stopping the counting) is performed by the number of excess winnings for. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the count limit control includes, in an individual period, when the number of winnings in a round exceeds the specified number of winnings in one round, Only the detection of the game ball by the first count switch 106 may be prohibited. Specifically, for example, the detection signal from the first count switch 106 may be invalidated by the number of excess winnings with respect to a prescribed winning number.

  (8) With regard to the count limit control described in the sixth embodiment, when the number of winnings in a certain round exceeds the specified number of winnings in one round during the individual period, the number of specified winnings in the next round It was shown that the control for limiting the counting of the number of winnings by the counter during the individual period (specifically, stopping the counting) is performed by the number of excess winnings for. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the number of winnings in one round exceeds the specified number of winnings in one round during the individual period, the counter for the number of winnings in excess of the specified number of winnings in the next round is also counted during the individual period. The number of winning prizes is counted according to the above, but control for stopping the updating of the individual period winning number display based on the individual period counter may be performed for the excess winning number with respect to the prescribed winning number.

(9) In each of the above-described embodiments, an example in which a long interval period that can easily distinguish between rounds is not provided is shown. However, in the configuration in which such an interval period is provided, The control described in the embodiment may be executed. In that case, the round interval period is handled as between each round, and the above-described effect control is performed. Further, in the above-described embodiment, an example in which the round control period starts from the 800 ms closing time shown in FIG. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the round control period is the control period when the opening / closing piece 81 is opened and closed once, as shown in FIG. 4, the opening time of 850 ms (the sum of the opening time of 850 ms and the closing time of 800 ms). ) May be controlled to start from. In that case, the round control period ends when the last 800 ms closing time ends. When such control is performed, the last 800 ms closing time is handled as between each round, and the above-described effect control may be performed. Further, the above-described effect control may be performed by treating the end of the control period of the previous round, that is, the start time of the control period of the subsequent round as a round. Further, in the above-described embodiment, an example is shown in which the bonus continuation effect display is performed between the round at the end of the individual period and the next round when the individual period winning number matches the expected number of winnings. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the bonus continuation effect display may be performed at the end of the round when the individual period ends, not between rounds, and the next round of the round after the individual period ends (the next individual period Bonus continuation effect display may be performed at the start of the first round.

  (10) In the first embodiment described above, when there are more winnings than the prescribed number of winnings in the round executed during the individual period, many winnings are obtained when the number of winnings in the individual period is larger than the expected winning number. An example is shown in which the number is added to the expected number of winnings notified by the bonus continuation effect display for the next individual period. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the number of winnings in the individual period is larger than the expected number of winnings, the expected number of winnings that will be notified by the bonus continuation effect display for the next individual period when the number of winnings is larger than the larger number You may make it add to. In addition, when the number of winnings in the individual period is larger than the expected number of winnings, the number of winnings smaller than the larger number of winnings is added to the expected number of winnings notified in the bonus continuous effect display for the next individual period. May be.

  (11) It should be understood that the embodiment disclosed this time is illustrative in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

It is the front view which looked at the pachinko game machine concerning this embodiment from the front. It is a block diagram which shows the relationship between a main board | substrate, various control boards, and an electrical component. It is a figure for demonstrating the various random counters used for game control. It is a figure explaining each opening operation | movement of a 1st special variable winning ball apparatus and a 2nd special variable winning ball apparatus in a table | surface form. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the symbol designation | designated command transmitted and the number of rounds to designate in table format about the big hit of specific big hit, 15R probability variation big hit, and 15R normal big hit. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the various random counters which the microcomputer for effect control uses for effect control. It is a figure which shows the continuous alerting | reporting pattern of the bonus effect which can be selected for every number of rounds determined when it determines with making it a specific jackpot in a table | surface form. It is a figure which shows the continuous alerting | reporting pattern of the bonus effect which can be selected for every number of rounds determined when it determines with making it a specific jackpot in a table | surface form. It is a figure which shows the continuous alerting | reporting pattern of the bonus effect which can be selected for every number of rounds determined when it determines with making it a specific jackpot in a table | surface form. It is a figure which shows the continuous alerting | reporting pattern of the bonus effect which can be selected for every number of rounds determined when it determines with making it a specific jackpot in a table | surface form. It is a figure which shows the continuous alerting | reporting pattern of the bonus effect which can be selected for every number of rounds determined when it determines with making it a specific jackpot in a table | surface form. It is a timing chart which shows the control timing of mid-round continuation control. It is a timing chart which shows the control timing of continuous delay control. It is a figure for demonstrating the whole flow of the game in a pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure for demonstrating the whole flow of the game in a pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure for demonstrating the whole flow of the game in a pachinko gaming machine. It is a display screen figure which shows the display of a bonus effect when the mid-round continuation control is performed in a specific jackpot gaming state. It is a display screen figure which shows the display of a bonus effect when continuous delay control is performed in a specific big hit game state. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the program of the main process performed by the microcomputer for game control. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the program of a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the subroutine program of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the subroutine program of a 1st winning opening winning ball counting process. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the subroutine program of a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the subroutine program of a game state determination process. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the subroutine program of a special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the subroutine program of a 1st grand prize opening pre-processing. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the subroutine program of the 1st big winning opening opening process. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the program of a production control main process, and a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the subroutine program of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a display control process process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st winning ball count process. It is a flowchart which shows the subroutine program of the 1st big hit release pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows the subroutine program of the 1st big hit opening process. It is a flowchart which shows the subroutine program of a normal round process. It is a flowchart which shows the subroutine program of a midway continuous round process. It is a timing chart which shows the control timing of alerting | reporting extension control. It is a display screen figure which shows the display of a bonus effect when alerting | reporting extension control is performed in a specific jackpot game state. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st winning ball count process by 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st big hit pre-opening process by 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal round process by 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the midway continuation round process by 2nd Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the control timing of display change control. It is a display screen figure which shows the display of a bonus effect when display change control is performed in a specific jackpot game state. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st winning ball count process by 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal round process by 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the midway continuation round process by 3rd Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the control timing of winning expected number increase change control. It is a timing chart which shows the control timing of winning expected number increase change control. It is a display screen figure which shows the display of a bonus effect when the winning expectation number increase change control is performed in a specific jackpot gaming state. It is a display screen figure which shows the display of a bonus effect when the winning expectation number increase change control is performed in a specific jackpot gaming state. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st big hit pre-release process by 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal round process by 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the midway continuation round process by 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st big hit pre-release process by 5th Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the control timing of count limiting control. It is a display screen figure which shows the display of a bonus effect when count limitation control is performed in a specific big hit game state. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st winning ball count process by 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal round process by 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the midway continuation round process by 6th Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the control timing of count double control. It is a display screen figure which shows the display of a bonus effect when count double control is performed in a specific big hit game state. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st winning ball count process by 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal round process by 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the midway continuation round process by 7th Embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine by the modification. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko gaming machine by the modification. It is a perspective view of the decoration member provided in the circumference | surroundings of the presentation display apparatus of the pachinko game machine by a modification. It is a display screen figure explaining the image displayed when a decoration symbol is variably displayed in the effect display device of the pachinko gaming machine according to the modification. It is a display screen figure explaining the image displayed when a decoration symbol is variably displayed in the effect display device of the pachinko gaming machine according to the modification. It is a display screen figure explaining the image displayed when a decoration symbol is variably displayed in the effect display device of the pachinko gaming machine according to the modification. It is a display screen figure explaining the image displayed when a decoration symbol is variably displayed in the effect display device of the pachinko gaming machine according to the modification. It is a display screen figure explaining the image displayed when a decoration symbol is variably displayed in the effect display device of the pachinko gaming machine according to the modification. It is a display screen figure explaining the image displayed when a decoration symbol is variably displayed in the effect display device of the pachinko gaming machine according to the modification. It is a display screen figure explaining the image displayed when a decoration symbol is variably displayed in the effect display device of the pachinko gaming machine according to the modification. It is a display screen figure explaining the image displayed when a decoration symbol is variably displayed in the effect display device of the pachinko gaming machine according to the modification. It is a display screen figure explaining the image displayed when a decoration symbol is variably displayed in the effect display device of the pachinko gaming machine according to the modification. It is a display screen figure explaining the image displayed when a decoration symbol is variably displayed in the effect display device of the pachinko gaming machine according to the modification. It is a display screen figure explaining the image displayed when a decoration symbol is variably displayed in the effect display device of the pachinko gaming machine according to the modification. It is a display screen figure explaining the image displayed when a decoration symbol is variably displayed in the effect display device of the pachinko gaming machine according to the modification. It is a display screen figure explaining the image displayed when a decoration symbol is variably displayed in the effect display device of the pachinko gaming machine according to the modification. It is a display screen figure explaining the image displayed when a decoration symbol is variably displayed in the effect display device of the pachinko gaming machine according to the modification. It is a display screen figure explaining the image displayed when a decoration symbol is variably displayed in the effect display device of the pachinko gaming machine according to the modification. It is a display screen figure explaining the image displayed when a decoration symbol is variably displayed in the effect display device of the pachinko gaming machine according to the modification. It is a display screen figure explaining the image displayed when a decoration symbol is variably displayed in the effect display device of the pachinko gaming machine according to the modification.

Explanation of symbols

  41 game area, 44a special symbol display device, 44b effect display device, 66 first special variable winning ball device, 81 opening and closing piece, 1 pachinko game machine, 99 game control microcomputer, 106 first count switch, 900 for effect control Microcomputer.

Claims (11)

A player who plays a game ball in a game area, displays a variation display of a plurality of types of identification information each identifiable, and displays a display result, and a player who easily wins a game ball A variable winning ball apparatus that changes between a first state that is advantageous to the player and a second state that is disadvantageous for a player who is less likely to win the game ball than the first state, and an effect unit that performs a predetermined effect. And the variable winning ball apparatus is intermittently switched from the second state to the first state when the display result of the variable display of the identification information on the variable display device is a predetermined specific display result. And when the number of winning game balls to the variable winning ball device in the round reaches a prescribed winning number, the variable winning ball device is operated to the second state and the round The Ryoshi, a gaming machine to control the specific game state to be repeated the number of times determined in advance the round,
Determining means for determining a total number of rounds, which is the total number of rounds repeatedly executed when controlling to the specific gaming state;
Detecting means for detecting a game ball won in the variable winning ball device,
The production means is
In the specific gaming state, a first effect means for executing a first effect that informs the specified number of winnings corresponding to the number of rounds smaller than the total number of rounds determined by the determining means as the expected number of winnings, can be specified;
First counting means for counting the number of prizes won in the variable winning ball apparatus during execution of the first presentation based on detection of the game ball by the detection means during execution of the first presentation;
First display means for displaying the number of winnings counted by the first counting means in an identifiable manner;
When the number of winnings counted by the first counting means reaches the expected number of winnings notified by the first effect, the first effect is ended and the fact that the specific gaming state is continued is notified, A second effect means for executing a second effect that informs the specified number of winnings corresponding to the number of rounds less than or equal to the remaining number of rounds not being executed among the total number of rounds so as to be identifiable as the expected number of winnings;
Second counting means for counting the number of winning prizes in the variable winning ball apparatus during execution of the second presentation based on detection of the game ball by the detection means during execution of the second presentation;
Second display means for displaying the number of winnings counted by the second counting means in an identifiable manner;
An end notification means for notifying that the specific gaming state is to be ended when there is no remaining number of rounds being executed among the total number of rounds,
The second effect means adds, when there are more prizes than the prescribed number of winnings in the round executed during the first effect, to the expected number of winnings to be notified in the second effect by a larger number of winning prizes. A gaming machine characterized by that. A player who plays a game ball in a game area, displays a variation display of a plurality of types of identification information each identifiable, and displays a display result, and a player who easily wins a game ball A variable winning ball apparatus that changes between a first state that is advantageous to the player and a second state that is disadvantageous for a player who is less likely to win the game ball than the first state, and an effect unit that performs a predetermined effect. And the variable winning ball apparatus is intermittently switched from the second state to the first state when the display result of the variable display of the identification information on the variable display device is a predetermined specific display result. And when the number of winning game balls to the variable winning ball device in the round reaches a prescribed winning number, the variable winning ball device is operated to the second state and the round The Ryoshi, a gaming machine to control the specific game state to be repeated the number of times determined in advance the round,
Determining means for determining a total number of rounds, which is the total number of rounds repeatedly executed when controlling to the specific gaming state;
Detecting means for detecting a game ball won in the variable winning ball device,
The production means is
In the specific gaming state, a first effect means for executing a first effect that informs the specified number of winnings corresponding to the number of rounds smaller than the total number of rounds determined by the determining means as the expected number of winnings, can be specified;
First counting means for counting the number of prizes won in the variable winning ball apparatus during execution of the first presentation based on detection of the game ball by the detection means during execution of the first presentation;
First display means for displaying the number of winnings counted by the first counting means in an identifiable manner;
When the number of winnings counted by the first counting means reaches the expected number of winnings notified by the first effect, the first effect is ended and the fact that the specific gaming state is continued is notified, A second effect means for executing a second effect that informs the specified number of winnings corresponding to the number of rounds less than or equal to the remaining number of rounds not being executed among the total number of rounds so as to be identifiable as the expected number of winnings;
Second counting means for counting the number of winning prizes in the variable winning ball apparatus during execution of the second presentation based on detection of the game ball by the detection means during execution of the second presentation;
Second display means for displaying the number of winnings counted by the second counting means in an identifiable manner;
An end notifying means for notifying that the specific gaming state is to be ended when there is no remaining number of rounds being executed among the total number of rounds;
And third counting means for counting the number of winnings won in the variable winning ball apparatus in a round executed during execution of the first effect based on detection of game balls by the detecting means,
When the number of winnings counted by the third counting unit is greater than the prescribed number of winnings in a round executed during the execution of the first effect, the second effect means performs the second effect by a larger number of winning prizes. A gaming machine, characterized by being added to the expected number of winnings to be notified. A player who plays a game ball in a game area, displays a variation display of a plurality of types of identification information each identifiable, and displays a display result, and a player who easily wins a game ball A variable winning ball apparatus that changes between a first state that is advantageous to the player and a second state that is disadvantageous for a player who is less likely to win the game ball than the first state, and an effect unit that performs a predetermined effect. And the variable winning ball apparatus is intermittently switched from the second state to the first state when the display result of the variable display of the identification information on the variable display device is a predetermined specific display result. And when the number of winning game balls to the variable winning ball device in the round reaches a prescribed winning number, the variable winning ball device is operated to the second state and the round The Ryoshi, a gaming machine to control the specific game state to be repeated the number of times determined in advance the round,
Determining means for determining a total number of rounds, which is the total number of rounds repeatedly executed when controlling to the specific gaming state;
Detecting means for detecting a game ball won in the variable winning ball device,
The production means is
In the specific gaming state, a first effect means for executing a first effect that informs the specified number of winnings corresponding to the number of rounds smaller than the total number of rounds determined by the determining means as the expected number of winnings, can be specified;
First counting means for counting the number of prizes won in the variable winning ball apparatus during execution of the first presentation based on detection of the game ball by the detection means during execution of the first presentation;
First display means for displaying the number of winnings counted by the first counting means in an identifiable manner;
When the number of winnings counted by the first counting means reaches the expected number of winnings notified by the first effect, the first effect is ended and the fact that the specific gaming state is continued is notified, A second effect means for executing a second effect that informs the specified number of winnings corresponding to the number of rounds less than or equal to the remaining number of rounds not being executed among the total number of rounds so as to be identifiable as the expected number of winnings;
Second counting means for counting the number of winning prizes in the variable winning ball apparatus during execution of the second presentation based on detection of the game ball by the detection means during execution of the second presentation;
Second display means for displaying the number of winnings counted by the second counting means in an identifiable manner;
An end notification means for notifying that the specific gaming state is to be ended when there is no remaining number of rounds being executed among the total number of rounds,
When the round executed during the execution of the first effect is completed from when the number of winnings counted by the first counting unit reaches the expected number of winnings notified by the first effect. Until this time, the notification that the specific gaming state is continued is continued, and the counting of the number of winnings by the second counting means is prohibited. A player who plays a game ball in a game area, displays a variation display of a plurality of types of identification information each identifiable, and displays a display result, and a player who easily wins a game ball A variable winning ball apparatus that changes between a first state that is advantageous to the player and a second state that is disadvantageous for a player who is less likely to win the game ball than the first state, and an effect unit that performs a predetermined effect. And the variable winning ball apparatus is intermittently switched from the second state to the first state when the display result of the variable display of the identification information on the variable display device is a predetermined specific display result. And when the number of winning game balls to the variable winning ball device in the round reaches a prescribed winning number, the variable winning ball device is operated to the second state and the round The Ryoshi, a gaming machine to control the specific game state to be repeated the number of times determined in advance the round,
Determining means for determining a total number of rounds, which is the total number of rounds repeatedly executed when controlling to the specific gaming state;
Detecting means for detecting a game ball won in the variable winning ball device,
The production means is
In the specific gaming state, a first effect means for executing a first effect that informs the specified number of winnings corresponding to the number of rounds smaller than the total number of rounds determined by the determining means as the expected number of winnings, can be specified;
First counting means for counting the number of prizes won in the variable winning ball apparatus during execution of the first presentation based on detection of the game ball by the detection means during execution of the first presentation;
First display means for displaying the number of winnings counted by the first counting means in an identifiable manner;
When the round executed during the execution of the first effect ends, the first effect ends, and the fact that the specific gaming state continues is notified, and the remaining unexecuted of the total number of rounds A second effect means for executing a second effect that informs the specified number of winnings corresponding to the number of rounds equal to or less than the number of rounds in an identifiable manner as the expected number of winnings;
Second counting means for counting the number of winning prizes in the variable winning ball apparatus during execution of the second presentation based on detection of the game ball by the detection means during execution of the second presentation;
Second display means for displaying the number of winnings counted by the second counting means in an identifiable manner;
An end notification means for notifying that the specific gaming state is to be ended when there is no remaining number of rounds being executed among the total number of rounds,
The first display means ends when the round executed during the execution of the first effect ends from when the number of winnings counted by the first counting means reaches the expected number of winnings notified by the first effect. Until each time the number of winning prizes is counted by the first counting means, an image that can identify the winning is displayed instead of the display that can identify the winning number. Machine. A player who plays a game ball in a game area, displays a variation display of a plurality of types of identification information each identifiable, and displays a display result, and a player who easily wins a game ball A variable winning ball apparatus that changes between a first state that is advantageous to the player and a second state that is disadvantageous for a player who is less likely to win the game ball than the first state, and an effect unit that performs a predetermined effect. And the variable winning ball apparatus is intermittently switched from the second state to the first state when the display result of the variable display of the identification information on the variable display device is a predetermined specific display result. And when the number of winning game balls to the variable winning ball device in the round reaches a prescribed winning number, the variable winning ball device is operated to the second state and the round The Ryoshi, a gaming machine to control the specific game state to be repeated the number of times determined in advance the round,
Determining means for determining a total number of rounds, which is the total number of rounds repeatedly executed when controlling to the specific gaming state;
Detecting means for detecting a game ball won in the variable winning ball device,
The production means is
In the specific gaming state, a first effect means for executing a first effect that informs the specified number of winnings corresponding to the number of rounds smaller than the total number of rounds determined by the determining means as the expected number of winnings, can be specified;
First counting means for counting the number of prizes won in the variable winning ball apparatus during execution of the first presentation based on detection of the game ball by the detection means during execution of the first presentation;
First display means for displaying the number of winnings counted by the first counting means in an identifiable manner;
When the number of winnings counted by the first counting means reaches the expected number of winnings notified by the first effect, the first effect is ended and the fact that the specific gaming state is continued is notified, A second effect means for executing a second effect that informs the specified number of winnings corresponding to the number of rounds less than or equal to the remaining number of rounds not being executed among the total number of rounds so as to be identifiable as the expected number of winnings;
Second counting means for counting the number of winning prizes in the variable winning ball apparatus during execution of the second presentation based on detection of the game ball by the detection means during execution of the second presentation;
Second display means for displaying the number of winnings counted by the second counting means in an identifiable manner;
An end notification means for notifying that the specific gaming state is to be ended when there is no remaining number of rounds being executed among the total number of rounds,
The gaming machine characterized in that the first effect means notifies the winning expectation number set to a number larger than a prescribed winning number corresponding to the number of rounds in which the first effect is executed as the expected winning number. .   When the round executed during the execution of the first effect ends, the second effect means does not reach the expected number of winnings notified by the first effect when the number of winnings counted by the first counting means is reached. The gaming machine according to claim 5, wherein the second performance is executed even at times. A player who plays a game ball in a game area, displays a variation display of a plurality of types of identification information each identifiable, and displays a display result, and a player who easily wins a game ball A variable winning ball apparatus that changes between a first state that is advantageous to the player and a second state that is disadvantageous for a player who is less likely to win the game ball than the first state, and an effect unit that performs a predetermined effect. And the variable winning ball apparatus is intermittently switched from the second state to the first state when the display result of the variable display of the identification information on the variable display device is a predetermined specific display result. And when the number of winning game balls to the variable winning ball device in the round reaches a prescribed winning number, the variable winning ball device is operated to the second state and the round The Ryoshi, a gaming machine to control the specific game state to be repeated the number of times determined in advance the round,
Determining means for determining a total number of rounds, which is the total number of rounds repeatedly executed when controlling to the specific gaming state;
Detecting means for detecting a game ball won in the variable winning ball device,
The production means is
In the specific gaming state, a first effect means for executing a first effect that informs the specified number of winnings corresponding to the number of rounds smaller than the total number of rounds determined by the determining means as the expected number of winnings, can be specified;
First counting means for counting the number of prizes won in the variable winning ball apparatus during execution of the first presentation based on detection of the game ball by the detection means during execution of the first presentation;
First display means for displaying the number of winnings counted by the first counting means in an identifiable manner;
When the number of winnings counted by the first counting means reaches the expected number of winnings notified by the first effect, the first effect is ended and the fact that the specific gaming state is continued is notified, A second effect means for executing a second effect that informs the specified number of winnings corresponding to the number of rounds less than or equal to the remaining number of rounds not being executed among the total number of rounds so as to be identifiable as the expected number of winnings;
Second counting means for counting the number of winning prizes in the variable winning ball apparatus during execution of the second presentation based on detection of the game ball by the detection means during execution of the second presentation;
Second display means for displaying the number of winnings counted by the second counting means in an identifiable manner;
An end notifying means for notifying that the specific gaming state is to be ended when there is no remaining number of rounds being executed among the total number of rounds;
And third counting means for counting the number of winnings won in the variable winning ball apparatus in a round executed during execution of the first effect based on detection of game balls by the detecting means,
The first counting means stops counting by the larger number of winnings when the number of winnings counted by the third counting means becomes larger than the prescribed winning number of the round. Machine. During the execution of the first production, a plurality of rounds are executed,
The first counting means stops counting in the next round of the round by the larger number of winnings when the number of winnings counted by the third counting means exceeds the prescribed winning number of the round. The gaming machine according to claim 7, wherein The effect means further includes notification time selection means for selecting whether to perform the notification that the specific gaming state continues by the second effect means during the period between rounds or during the period of rounds,
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 8, wherein the second effect unit performs notification that the specific gaming state is continued in a period selected by the notification time selection unit.   The first effect means reports a value that is not a multiple of the prescribed winning number in one round as the expected winning number when the period during the round is selected as the period for performing the notification by the notification time selection means. The gaming machine according to claim 9, wherein: The effect means includes a selection pattern data storage means for storing a plurality of types of data indicating selection patterns of expected winning numbers in the first effect and the second effect;
Determination of expected number of winnings for determining expected number of winnings to be notified in the first effect and the second effect by selecting data indicating a selection pattern from a plurality of types of data stored in the selection pattern data storage means Further comprising means,
The data stored in the selected pattern data storage means is notified in the second effect when a value that is not a multiple of the prescribed winning number in one round is selected as the expected number of winnings to be notified in the first effect. The selection pattern is set so that the expected number of winnings is set to a value that is not a multiple of the specified winning number, and is higher than a ratio that is not selected to be a value that is not a multiple of the specified winning number. The gaming machine according to claim 9, wherein the gaming machine is characterized.

Images